CLSM3 Online Help Overview of the programming

CLSM3 Online Help Overview of the programming
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 1 sur 249
CLSM3 Online Help
Online Help version 5.4
29/03/2006
Overview of the programming workshop
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
This section provides an overview of the programming workshop
What's in this Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Overview of the programming workshop
Overview of the programming workshop
At a Glance
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter provides an overview of the programming workshop
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Overview of the Programming Workshop
Creating or Modifying the Configuration of an Application
Overview of the Programming Workshop
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 2 sur 249
Languages Used
The controller offers 2 programming languages:
LD language: Ladder language
FBD language: Function Block Diagram
These languages use:
Predefined function blocks:
Timers
Counters
Specific functions:
Time management
Character string
Communication, etc.
Ladder language
Ladder language (LD) is a graphic language. It can be used to transcribe relay diagrams, and is suited
to combinational processing.
It provides basic graphic symbols: contacts, coils, blocks.
Specific calculations can be executed within the operation blocks.
Example of a program in Ladder language:
FBD mode
FBD mode allows graphic programming based on the use of predefined function blocks.
It offers a large range of basic functions: timer, counter, logic, etc.
Example of a program in FBD language:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 3 sur 249
FBD mode allows graphic programming based on the use of predefined function blocks.
It offers a large range of basic functions: timer, counter, logic, etc.
Operating Modes
There are several operating modes for the programming workshop:
Edit mode
Edit mode is used to construct programs in FBD mode, which corresponds to the development of the
application.
Simulation mode
In simulation mode the program is executed offline directly in the programming workshop (simulated
on the PC).
In this mode, each action on the chart (changing the state of an input, output forcing) updates the
simulation windows.
Monitoring mode
In Monitoring mode, the program is executed on the controller, the programming workshop is
connected to the controller (PC ↔ controller connection).
The different windows are updated cyclically.
In simulation and monitoring modes, it is possible to:
View the output states and function block parameters of the program corresponding to the wiring
sheet in the supervision window.
Force the inputs/outputs to test program behavior under specific conditions.
Creating or Modifying the Configuration of an Application
Introduction
This is an important phase, as it determines the future configuration of the work environment.
Description
The Menu: File → New and the Menu: Controller → Choose the type of controller are used to
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 4 sur 249
choose or modify the type of controller and/or extensions as well as the programming language.
If the user modifies the programming language of an application opened in edit mode, then the current
application must be closed and a new application created.
This function displays a series of screens:
The first is used to choose the type of controller
The second is used to add an extension if necessary
The third is used to choose the programming language, FBD or LD (the LD option is not offered for
analog extensions)
Creating an Application
Procedure for creating an application:
Step
Action
1
Select the menu File → New.
Result: The Choice of Controller window appears.
2
In the Select your controller category zone, select the category by clicking on the corresponding check
box.
The controllers are grouped by categories corresponding to:
The number of inputs/outputs
The presence or absence of an operator display
Whether or not it is possible to connect extensions
Result: The list of corresponding controllers appears in the Select the type of controller to program zone.
3
Select the controller by double-clicking on the corresponding line then confirm using the Next > button.
Result: The following options are available at this stage:
If the controller does not support extensions, go directly to step 6.
If the controller supports extensions, 2 new zones appear in the window:
Current selection: summarizing the choices made in steps 2 and 3
Select extensions: listing the compatible extensions
4
In the Select extensions zone, select the extension type to be added in the Compatible extensions list by
double-clicking on the corresponding line or by using the Add button.
Result: The selected extension appears in the Selected extensions list.
The extension can be removed from the Selected extensions list by clicking on it then using the Delete
button.
Note: The XE10 24VDC extension is an expandable extension. If this extension is chosen then it is possible
to add another extension.
5
Confirm the configuration by clicking on the Next> button.
Result: The type of programming selection zone appears.
6
To choose the type of programming, click on the associated drawing.
Click on the Next> button to confirm.
7
The edit window appears with a blank wiring sheet.
For an application in FBD mode
For each controller type (+ extensions where applicable) there is a drawing background displayed in the Edit
window surrounded by I/O specific to the type chosen as well as a specific set of FBD functions presented in
the function bar. The names of the controller and extensions are displayed above the wiring sheet.
For an application in LD mode
For each module type (+ extensions where applicable) there is a specific set and number of LD functions in
the function bar. The names of the module and extensions are displayed above the wiring sheet.
Modifying the Configuration of an Application
Procedure for modifying the configuration of an application:
Step
Action
1
Click on the menu : Controller → Choose the type of controller...
Result: The summary window appears on the screen.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
2
Page 5 sur 249
Modify the parameters to obtain the configuration required.
To:
Modify the controller type: Click once on the Previous button, then follow the procedure for creating an
application from step 2.
Add, modify or delete an extension: Proceed as if creating an application from step 4.
Modify the programming type: Click on the illustration showing the type of programming desired.
3
Confirm the changes by clicking on the Next button.
Result: The wiring sheet is displayed on the screen.
How to start with the programming workshop
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
This part explains, through a set of questions and answers, how to use the programming workshop.
What's in this Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
How to get started with the programming workshop
How to get started with the programming workshop
At a Glance
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter explains, through a set of questions and answers, how to use the programming workshop.
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Glossary
How to create a new program
How to Program an Application Using the Programming Software
How to connect the programming workshop to the controller
How to transfer the program from the PC to the controller
How to protect the controller resident program
How to Debug an Application Without Loading it onto the Controller: Simulation
How to Monitor and Modify an Application Running on the Controller from the Programming
Workshop: Monitoring
Meaning of the Error Codes on the Controller Front Panel
How to diagnose the state of the controller
How to control the controller from the programming workshop
How to Control the Controller from the Front Panel
How to Configure an Application from the Controller Front Panel
How to Dynamically Modify Program Data Using the Controller Front Panel
How to recover the controller resident program in the programming workshop
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 6 sur 249
How to Check an Application Using the Programming Workshop
How to check the controller software
How to use the backup memory cartridge
How to Configure the Language of the Programming Workshop and the Controller
How the Controller Behaves in the Event of Power Failure
How to Import an Application Developed with Millenium 2 into Millenium 3
File Location
Glossary
Description
Definitions of commonly-used terms are provided to make the help easier to read.
AC: Alternative Current (230AC, 24AC)
MAC address: Media Access Control. Unique (worldwide) hardware address of a network card or
peripheral coded on 6 bytes. It is assigned by the device manufacturer.
LCD display: Screen placed on some controller boxes to enable standalone use of the controller
(control, parameter setting, monitoring, etc.) via the use of keys.
Application: User program
Modular or expandable controller: Controller that can be connected side-by-side with additional
intelligent communication units (Modbus, Ethernet), or I/O units, etc. known as Extensions.
FBD: Function Block Diagram
FDR: The FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) service is part of the Transparent Ready installation
strategy. It is designed to provide the user with the same level of service as that currently available
on other fieldbuses. If a device fails, once the replacement device is physically connected to the
network, the system (including the device) is capable of:
Supplying the device with the same IP address as the previous one
Ensuring that the device is functionally compatible with the previous one
Restoring the device application parameters so that it restarts in the same context as before the
failure
Wiring sheet: Work surface of the Edit window:
Includes the input and output plots for an application in FBD mode
Includes columns for the contacts and a column for the coils of an application in LD mode
Drag/Drop: Operation which consists of left-clicking and moving the mouse while holding down the
left button, then releasing the button at the required position on the screen.
Chart: Drawing of the program in the Edit window (also called diagram)
Workshop HMI: Human Machine Interface of the programming workshop executed on a PC
LD: Ladder Diagram
Controller software : Software saved in the controller memory. This software ensures controller
operation.
Macro: A MACRO is a group of function blocks. It is characterized by its number, its name, its links,
its internal function blocks and its input/output connections.
Shortcut menu: Menu that appears by right-clicking the mouse.
MEI: The MEI (Modbus Encapsulated Interface) is a mechanism for encapsulating service requests
and invocation methods, as well as their responses in a Modbus frame.
Monitoring: Action used to scan data and parameters modified in the controller from the workshop,
on a PC (online mode) or on the controller LCD display.
Gateway: Device that connects networks of different architectures, working on the application layer.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 7 sur 249
This term may refer to a router.
Program: See application
Diagram: Program drawing in the program window
SFC: Sequential Function Chart, programming mode similar to GRAFCET
Supervision: Term characterizing the HMI Software window displaying the program data and
parameters scanned during a simulation or monitoring phase
DISCR: Discrete
Connection types:
DISCR (Discrete)
ANA (analog)
Status token (SFC) in FBD mode
How to create a new program
Description
See Creating an Application.
How to Program an Application Using the Programming Software
Description
See, according to the programming language:
LD Programming from the Programming Software, or,
FBD Programming from the Programming Software.
How to connect the programming workshop to the controller
Description
See Configuring the communication between the programming workshop and the controller
How to transfer the program from the PC to the controller
Description
See Transferring the program from the PC to the controller
How to protect the controller resident program
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 8 sur 249
Description
See Protection of the program saved on the controller
How to Debug an Application Without Loading it onto the
Controller: Simulation
Introduction
Before loading a program onto a controller, it is possible to simulate execution using the programming
workshop.
In simulation mode, for each action that the user performs, there is a corresponding simulation, whose
results are displayed in the Front Panel, Edit and Supervision windows.
Access
After creating a diagram in the wiring sheet, click on the S icon in the controller bar to access simulation
mode.
Front Panel Window
The Front Panel window accessible via the :Window menu represents the controller front panel. The
keys can be used like real keys. Each click allows use of any function that could be accessed from the
front panel of a real controller. The result of these actions is then displayed in the simulation on the
LCD screen.
The Edit and Supervision Windows
The Edit and Supervision windows accessible via the :Window menu are illustrated by an FBD
example in the following illustration:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 9 sur 249
The table below lists the different elements:
Number
Description
1
Simu/monitoring bar
The simu/monitoring bar is used to modify simulation rates or to simulate certain events affecting the
controller. This highlights all the transient problems, in particular upon launching the application and when
power is restored following a power failure.
The Refresh period corresponds to the frequency with which the output and parameter values are updated
in the open application windows.
The Number of cycles integer is the number of cycles executed during a refresh period.
2
Edit window
The edit window shows the program on a wiring sheet and is used to view the various states and numerical
values being used.
The states and values may be temporarily modified or permanently forced by double-clicking or right-clicking.
3
Supervision window
The supervision window displays inputs and outputs for a selection of functions. The functions are chosen in
Edit mode, see How to Prepare the Supervision Window.
4
Link in active state
The color is configurable according to state. Active (ON) or Inactive (OFF) state is specified on each side of
the link.
5
The same function block with animated inputs/outputs and parameters in the edit and supervision windows.
How to Prepare the Supervision Window
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 10 sur 249
To select the functions to be displayed in the supervision window, proceed as follows.
Step
Action
1
Switch to Edit mode by clicking on the E button.
2
Open the supervision window from the Window menu.
3
Select: Window → Tile.
Result: The supervision and edit windows appear one below the other.
4
Select a function in the edit window.
5
Drag and drop the function onto the supervision window.
6
Repeat steps 3 to 5 to drop as many functions as necessary.
How to Control Simulation
The table below lists the possible actions on a simulation:
To...
proceed as follows:
Stop or restart simulation...
Use the pause button
in the jump event window.
on the simu/monitoring bar or the one
Highlight all transient problems...
Set the Number of cycles to 1 and increase the Refresh period in
the simu/monitoring bar.
Browse the application operation...
Increase the Number of cycles to 255 in the simu/monitoring bar.
Go directly to an event or a date and precise time...
Click on the
window.
button to go to the Time Prog Jump Event
Simulate a power failure followed by a power return...
Click on the
Click again on the
button (the simulator clock will freeze).
button.
Simulate a power failure followed by a power return at a
particular date and time...
Click on the
button (the simulator clock will freeze).
Select: Controller → Read/Write date and time.
Enter the desired date and time for power return in the Date and
Time fields of the Set Clock window.
Confirm by clicking on the Write to the controller button.
Click again on the
button.
Display a summary table...
Click on the
button to go to the Function Blocks window.
Time Prog Jump Event Window
The Time Prog Jump Event window, accessible using the
looks like this:
button on the simu/monitoring bar,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 11 sur 249
The table below lists the different elements:
Number
Description
1
The date and time displayed show the simulation time. They depend on the number of cycles executed for
each refresh period and on the basic cycle time.
2
The Set Clock button is used to advance or put back the date and time (confirm by clicking on the Write to
the controller button).
3
The Pause button is used to stop or restart simulation.
4
The Next event button is used to advance to the next Time Prog event.
This button can only be used if events have been defined using a Time Prog function. See, according to the
programming language:
Clocks in LD, or
Time Prog in FBD
Function Blocks Window
The Function Blocks window, accessible using the Summary table
simu/monitoring bar, summarizes for each function:
The symbol (FBD) or number (LD)
button on the
The type of function
The block number (FBD) or Label (LD)
The parameters (for the relevant functions)
Whether the Save on power failure option has been selected
The current value (for relevant functions)
Whether it is possible to modify function parameters from the controller front panel
The comment entered by the user
The position on the wiring diagram (LD only)
It also provides access to the parameters for each function by double-clicking on the relevant line.
How to Monitor and Modify an Application Running on the
Controller from the Programming Workshop: Monitoring
Description
To remotely monitor or modify the behavior of a program running on a controller, the user can use the
monitoring function. This monitoring allows the user:
To temporarily modify or permanently force:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 12 sur 249
Any of the FBD function outputs
Any LD contact
The majority of the function parameters
As well as all the buttons on the controller front panel
Then to display periodically the execution of the program, observing:
The values of the controller I/O and its extensions
The FBD block outputs
The coil and LD contact outputs
The current state of the parameters and the displays of the controller front panel when online
These modifications and display happen:
Either in the programming workshop windows, which can be accessed:
Via the window menu: Edit, Supervision, Controller front panel
Via the icons on the bar at the bottom of the monitoring window (LD only): Function blocks,
Discrete inputs, Discrete outputs
This shows:
The state of the controller I/O and any extensions
The program states
The I/O and parameters (including output parameters) of the FBD function blocks
The states of the contacts/coils and of the parameters of the LD diagram corresponding to the
program operating on the controller
Or, in monitoring mode, the controller bar provides access to a set of icons that can be used to start
and stop application execution in the controller and set the frequency at which output and parameter
values are updated in open application windows.
The current value of each link is displayed near the function block output. Monitoring mode is
independent of the "Controller On/Off" function. If the controller is off, only modifications to the
parameters and the inputs on the buttons of the controller front panel are displayed.
Note: The Monitoring mode cannot be considered as a dependable debugging method, because on
the online controller that switches to monitoring mode, the basic cycle time is extended by the
communication times between the PC and the controller and possible permanent forcing times
applied to the application. No guarantee can be given concerning the actual duration of cycle times
during this operating mode. Moreover, during this operating mode, the WATCHDOG action linked to
the application is deactivated.
In addition, when applications without permanent forcing are executed, the application may run on
the controller for a time that is much shorter than the refresh period of the PC monitoring windows. It
is not therefore possible to observe actions on the controller that are executed at less than twice the
monitoring screens refresh period (Shannon sampling rule).
Switch to Controller and programming workshop monitoring Mode
The programmer can only switch to this mode if the controller:
contains a program in which parameter modification is not read/write protected by a password
contains a program in which parameter modification is read/write protected and where the
programmer knows the password
The HMI checks whether a password protects the program and parameters or the controller
parameters. If this is the case, the HMI displays the Password dialog window. The chart in the Edit
window must be consistent with the program in the controller. The HMI starts the "Compare the
controller data with the program" function. If a difference is found, the HMI returns to edit mode.
Following these checks, simply click on the M button in the toolbar to switch to monitoring mode. After
this action, the following is displayed:
Either, in the controller toolbar, a set of icons that can be used to start and stop application execution
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 13 sur 249
in the controller and the frequency at which output and parameter values are updated in the open
application windows.
Or in the programming workshop windows, which can be accessed:
Via the window menu: Edit, Supervision, Controller front panel
Via the icons on the bar at the bottom of the monitoring window (LD only): Function blocks,
Discrete inputs, Discrete outputs.
This shows:
The state of the controller I/O and any extensions
The program states
The I/O and parameters (including output parameters) of the FBD function blocks
The states of the contacts/coils and the parameters of the LD diagram.
Front Panel Window
This window allows you to click with the mouse on any key on the controller front panel which is
depicted in the window. The keys in the Front Panel window can be used like keys on the actual
controller front panel. Any function which can be accessed from the front panel of an actual controller
can be applied to the actual controller with a single mouse click. The result of these actions is then
displayed in the copy on the LCD screen.
Monitoring Control
The commands that can be used to control monitoring are:
The Stop button on the controller bar
The On button
The time between 2 displays of controller data on the screen (modifiable value)
The refresh frequency of the Monitoring bar corresponds to the frequency at which the output and
parameter values are updated in the application windows that are open during monitoring mode:
decreasing this frequency, and consequently the refresh period, reduces the workload of the
programming workshop that monopolizes the PC to the detriment of other system or user programs.
Note: Modification of the refresh frequency is essential in order to limit the time allotted to the
programming workshop by the Windows system. This is because in older Windows systems or small
PC configurations, the load used by the programming workshop in monitoring mode significantly
slows down open applications running in parallel or system operations.
The Edit Window
Display
Displays user programs written in chart form.
Shows the FBD discrete links in "inactive" color.
Shows contacts, coils and LD links which are OFF in "inactive" color.
Shows the FBD discrete links in "active" color.
Shows contacts, coils and LD links which are ON in "active" color.
Shows each active step of an SFC chart in "active" color.
Shows the current value of each numerical link on an FBD chart.
Animates all FBD functions that have only one discrete output, according to the state of this discrete
output.
Animates all LD contacts that have only one discrete output, according to the state of this discrete
output.
Shows the value of all the FBD function parameters, by double-clicking on the function block.
Shows the value of all the LD function parameters, by right-clicking with the mouse on each contact
or coil and then selecting "Settings window" in the menu that is displayed.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 14 sur 249
Forced values are highlighted in the Edit and Supervision windows by a change in background color.
FBD Actions
Can be used to temporarily modify the state of any Discrete or Token output or link of an FBD chart,
by left-clicking on it with the mouse (change from ON/OFF).
Can be used to temporarily modify the state of any FBD chart output or numerical link, by leftclicking on it with the mouse, entering a signed integer value in the "Analog Value" window, and then
confirming by pressing OK.
Can be used to permanently force the state of any Discrete or Token link or output of an FBD chart,
by right-clicking on it with the mouse, selecting "Force and maintain" in the menu displayed, entering
ON or OFF in the "Permanent Forcing" window, and then confirming by pressing OK.
Can be used to permanently force the state of any numerical link output of an FBD chart, by rightclicking on it with the mouse, selecting "Force and maintain" in the menu displayed, entering a
signed integer value in the "Analog Value" window, and then confirming by pressing OK.
Can be used to modify the value of a subset of FBD function parameters, by double-clicking on the
function block, modifying one or more of the non-grayed out parameters and confirming by pressing
OK.,
Can be used to release a forced output or link by right-clicking on it with the mouse and selecting
"Release" in the menu displayed.
Can be used to release all forced outputs or links by right-clicking in the window with the mouse and
selecting "Release all" in the menu displayed.
LD Actions
Can be used to temporarily modify the state of any LD chart contact, by left-clicking on it with the
mouse (change from ON/OFF).
Can be used to permanently force the state of any LD chart contact, by right-clicking on it with the
mouse, selecting "Force and maintain" in the menu displayed, entering ON or OFF in the
"Permanent Forcing" window, and then confirming by pressing OK.
Can be used to modify the value of a subset of LD function parameters, by right-clicking on each
contact or coil with the mouse, then selecting "Settings window" in the menu displayed, modifying
one or more of the non-grayed out parameters and confirming by pressing OK
Can be used to release the state of any LD chart contact by right-clicking on it with the mouse and
selecting "Release" in the menu displayed.
Can be used to release all forced outputs or links by right-clicking in the window with the mouse and
selecting "Release all" in the menu displayed.
Supervision Window
Display
Displays the FBD edit functions selected in this window as FBD function blocks.
Displays the LD edit functions selected in this window as FBD function blocks.
Shows the discrete FBD function block outputs that are OFF in "inactive" color (blue by default).
Shows the discrete FBD function blocks that are ON in "active" color (red or pink by default) (discrete
outputs and FBD blocks that are active and not supplied with power are displayed in orange).
Shows each active step of an SFC chart in "active" color (red by default).
Shows the current value of each numerical output of an FBD function block.
Animates all FBD function blocks that have only one discrete output, according to the state of its
discrete output.
Shows the value of all the FBD function block parameters, by double-clicking on the function block or
right-clicking on each contact or coil with the mouse, and then selecting "Settings window" in the
menu that is displayed.
Forced values are highlighted in the Edit and Supervision windows by a change in background color.
Actions
Can be used to temporarily modify the state of any Discrete or Token output of an FBD function
block, by left-clicking on it with the mouse (change from ON/OFF)
Can be used to temporarily modify the state of any FBD function block output or numerical link, by
left-clicking on it with the mouse, entering a signed integer value in the "Analog Value" window, and
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 15 sur 249
then confirming by pressing OK.
Can be used to permanently force the state of any Discrete or Token output of an FBD function
block, by right-clicking on it with the mouse, selecting "Force and maintain" in the menu displayed,
entering ON or OFF in the "Permanent Forcing" window, and then confirming by pressing OK.
Can be used to permanently force the state of any numerical output of an FBD function block, by
right-clicking on it with the mouse, selecting "Force and maintain" in the menu displayed, entering a
signed integer value in the "Analog Value" window, and then confirming by pressing OK.
Can be used to modify the value of a subset of FBD function block parameters, by double-clicking on
the function block, modifying one or more non-grayed out parameters, then confirming by pressing
OK. This action can also be performed by right-clicking each contact or coil with the mouse, then
selecting "Settings window" in the menu displayed, modifying one or more non-grayed out
parameters, then confirming by pressing OK.
Can be used to release a forced output by right-clicking on it with the mouse and selecting "Release"
in the menu displayed.
Can be used to release all forced outputs by right-clicking in the window with the mouse and
selecting "Release all" in the menu displayed.
Meaning of the Error Codes on the Controller Front Panel
Description
See Description of Errors
How to diagnose the state of the controller
Description
See Controller diagnostics
How to control the controller from the programming workshop
Description
See ON/OFF program execution commands.
How to Control the Controller from the Front Panel
Description
The LCD display and the command keys can be used to:
Identify the controller and its extensions
Monitor the state of the controller
Configure the controller and its extensions (date, time, etc.)
Configure and execute a user program
Transfer user programs to and from a memory cartridge
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 16 sur 249
The front panel looks like this:
1 First 4 lines on the screen where the menus and elements associated with each menu are displayed.
2 Illustrative symbols (in the above example all 4 symbols are present)
3 Command keys
Note: The LCD screen is lit for 30 seconds when the user presses any of the buttons on the front
panel.
First 4 Lines
On the first 4 lines of the screen, the display consists of:
Either information
Or several actions that can be selected. In this case, only the field that flashes can be selected and
its selection triggers an action
When the information and actions to be performed do not fit in the 4 lines, the symbols and ↓ on the
right-hand column indicate that there is information on the lines above or below those on the screen.
These lines can be accessed via the
and
keys.
Symbols
The symbols are described in the table below:
Symbol
Meaning
State of the controller. In ON mode it is moving, in OFF mode it is stationary.
Faults have appeared (see FAULT menu).
The controller is connected to the programming workshop.
The application is protected by a password.
Command Keys
The command keys are the 4 right-hand arrow keys:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 17 sur 249
The command keys are described in the table below:
Key
Functions according to the situations
Movement in the screen to the left
Return to the previous menu when the application is OFF
Return to the I/O menu or possibly an active menu when the application is ON
Movement in the screen downwards or to the right
Decrease a previously selected value
Movement in the screen upwards or to the left
Increase a previously selected value
Display of the screen for the menu associated with the field that is flashing
Selection of a value to be modified
How to Configure an Application from the Controller Front Panel
Description
Setting the parameters for a user program makes it possible to:
Change the Summer time and Winter daylight saving time switchover settings
Configure each of the functions that make up the application
A function’s parameters can only be set from the controller front panel if Modification authorized has
been checked for this function in the programming workshop.
See PARAMETERS Menu
How to Dynamically Modify Program Data Using the Controller
Front Panel
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 18 sur 249
Description
Program data can be modified dynamically, in FBD language only, using the FBD Display function.
See FBD DISPLAY
How to recover the controller resident program in the
programming workshop
Description
See Transferring the program from the controller to the PC
How to Check an Application Using the Programming Workshop
Overview
The check command launches program compilation.
Two types of check can be used for an application:
The first checks consistency of the diagrams
The second checks the performance of the user application, i.e. the compatibility of:
The memory usage
The user application cycle times
The memory capacities
The controller execution speed
Diagram Consistency Check
Compilation is carried out automatically in the following cases:
Switching from Edit mode to Simulation/Monitoring mode
Transferring the program to the controller
Consistency of FBDs: This only concerns SFC network wiring errors. FBD networks always behave
consistently: inconsistent wiring is impossible, and if an input is not hard-wired it is set to a constant
value that does not affect execution of the function or makes it passive. See the online help for each
function.
Consistency of LDs: The LD network can be simulated, loaded and executed on the controller at any
time. Hence it can be built and debugged one step at a time. However when wiring anomalies are
detected (cable without termination, function Reset not connected, etc.) an eye symbol goes from blue
to red in the upper panel of the edit window. Double-click on the red eye to open a program consistency
window which gives details of any detected anomalies. These warnings are always intended to draw
the user’s attention to unusual wiring instances, which may nevertheless be perfectly justified in certain
applications. As a general rule, these warnings correspond either to incomplete wiring, or to certain
inputs not being hard-wired (e.g.: function Reset ), to parameters left at their default value, or to certain
odd Clock configurations (where the output stays ON permanently).
User Application Performance Check
This appears in the Compilation Result window in the following cases:
Activation of the menu: Edit → Check the program
Switching from Edit mode to Simulation/Monitoring mode
Transferring the program to the controller
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 19 sur 249
These performance checks are useful on a simulator as they can be used to obtain a controller that
meets the requirements of the proposed application, once the application has been created and
simulation-tested.
Note: When optional, the window is only displayed when the controller capacities (memory space
and execution speed) are too low in relation to the user program being checked.
Note: The compilation time for programs that use more than 128 FBDs or SFCs and numerous
loops, may exceed several minutes.
User Application Memory Size Check
The available memory resources depend on the type of controller and operating mode selected for the
controller software.
The program compiler calculates the volumes used in the different controller memory zones:
Parameters: 2 bytes for each integer and 1 byte for the other types
Parameters associated with LDs: the number of bytes corresponding to the maximum number of LD
lines, and to the maximum number of function descriptions that can be programmed on the selected
controller (independently of the programming workshop)
Bit data (block outputs):
1 bit per Discrete, or per SFC Token, or per Boolean (in FBD)
1 bit per contact (in LD)
Other data (function block outputs): 2 bytes for each integer
Program zone: the number of bytes corresponding to all program function blocks displayed in FBD,
and all functions that can be programmed on the selected controller type (independently of the
programming workshop).
In the event of capacity overflow, the window is still displayed and the overflow zones are shown in red.
The zones shown in blue alert the user to the fact that the size of the application memory zone
concerned is very close to the maximum capacity of the corresponding memory zone on the selected
controller.
User Application Estimated Duration Check
The compiler also calculates the estimated duration of the program by adding together the individual
cycle times of each function used.
The user application runs periodically and its execution period is defined by the user in the basic cycle
time.
This time corresponds to the minimum sampling period of the controller inputs (exception: High-speed
counter function) and the minimum time for modifying the output values. The application response time
is therefore twice the duration of this period.
Note: (Take account of the fact that the compiler arranges the functions of an FBD diagram from
inputs to outputs, cutting the loops as close as possible to the outputs and SFC diagrams from each
INIT STEP or RESET INIT, to the downstream steps. )
Not all automation applications need blocking on overrun of the target application execution period.
Indeed, in some cases such blocking is dangerous.
Consequently, the user may decide whether or not to use a WATCHDOG that will generate an alarm or
error if the application is in ON mode on the controller, when the application cycle time, added to the
duration of the processing specific to operation of the controller and any extensions, exceeds the
duration of the selected period.
A WATCHDOG warning may be returned to an FBD program to enable activation of a retrieval
sequence in the application. This is done using the controller status function.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 20 sur 249
Note: All functions have a defined maximum cycle time, with one exception in FBD: The cycle time of
the TIME PROG function may vary from 1 to 51 depending on the number of events used.
To determine the duration of the program execution period, programmers must:
Take into account the estimated duration in the compilation results table.
Carefully read and apply the recommendations written in the online help file: available duration for
the program.
To guarantee a constant program cycle time, you must also carry out appropriate tests on the controller
to verify that alarm or error 51 does not appear.
Duration of Processing Specific to Operation of the Controller and any Extensions
In addition to the processing time for the function blocks contained in the application program, there are
a number of additional processing operations during an execution period which can easily be defined
(as long as fixed) and are therefore taken into account when calculating the time available for executing
the application on each period (compilation result).
But there are others, which can be either occasional or hard to quantify or account for.
Processing that is hard to quantify:
Synchronous periodic interrupts which take up 1 ms for each 10 ms in a period (i.e. 1 ms for a period
of 10 ms and 5 ms for a period of 50 ms). These interrupts are used to acquire microprocessor
inputs.
Interrupts relating to the high-speed counter (H-SPEED COUNT).
Episodic processes:
Clock management: switch between summer and winter time: 1.60 ms.
Compensation for clock drift once a week, every Sunday at 1 o’clock in the morning: 4.38 ms.
The WATCHDOG is always ineffective while one of these operations takes place.
Note: If the application presents no danger to people or equipment in the event of an increase in the
cycle time, simply disable the WATCHDOG. Otherwise, you must check the maximum execution
period.
Note: Measurements of analog input values on controllers supplied with an AC voltage (24 VAC and
100-240 VAC) are performed every 20 ms. Consequently, if you choose a cycle time of 10 ms,
analog input acquisition for these types of controllers will take place every two cycles.
Note: Modifying parameters using other commands (PARAMETERS, etc.) increases the application
execution period by a variable time. The WATCHDOG is always ineffective in this controller
operating mode (Controller status).
Note: In the same way, the display of various data (text, data, hour, date) by active functions, on the
controller LCD display increases the application cycle time by a variable duration. This duration
depends on the type of data to be displayed and, for the FBD, on the number of DISPLAYS
simultaneously active.
Note: In Monitoring mode, the cycle times are increased by the communication times between the
PC and the controller. No guarantee can be given concerning the actual cycle times during this
operating mode. The WATCHDOG is always ineffective in this controller operating mode (Controller
status).
Maximum Application Execution Period on the Controller Check
Given the problems of accurately estimating the user application cycle time and that of certain
processing operations specific to controller operation, in which increasing the application execution
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 21 sur 249
period may present a danger to people or equipment, you must perform the relevant tests on the
controller to make sure that alarm 51 (cycle overflow) does not appear, in order to guarantee the
maximum cycle time of your program. See WATCHDOG.
How to check the controller software
Description
See Controller diagnostics
How to use the backup memory cartridge
Description
See CARTRIDGE Menu
How to Configure the Language of the Programming Workshop
and the Controller
Description
To configure the language used in the programming workshop and on the controller front panel,
proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Use the menu: File → Preferences ... in the programming workshop.
2
Update the controller software.
How the Controller Behaves in the Event of Power Failure
Power Failure
A power failure causes the following behavior:
The application is blocked, the controller LCD display freezes, and the buttons stop working. The
outputs calculated by the application are frozen in the status they had prior to detection of the power
failure.
The links with the PC and any extensions are blocked:
The programming software displays the following message: The target peripheral is not reacting.
Check the connection.
The outputs of all I/O extensions are deactivated
The Modbus extension normally continues to transmit for 80 ms after the power failure that
affected the controller.
After 80 ms, the Modbus extension detects incorrect controller operation and sets the status word
to Time_OUT_SPI, then loses its controller-dependent power supply.
The controller display goes blank, the backlighting switches off and all controller outputs are
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 22 sur 249
deactivated.
The date and time continue to increment during the power failure on controllers equipped with a
clock (battery powered).
Restart Following a Power Failure
The controller checks all its extensions are operating normally, then returns the data saved on the
power failure, and restarts the application execution with a specific initialization sequence for power
return.
This sequence initializes all function inputs and outputs, except the outputs of the functions protected
by a checked Save on power failure parameter.
In this case, these outputs are not reset, and therefore retain the value they had at the time of the
power failure.
To find out which function outputs are protected on power failure, consult the function description.
Functions with parameters in LD mode:
Auxiliary relays
Discrete outputs
Timers
Counters
High-speed counters
Functions with parameters in FBD mode:
The ARCHIVE function
Preset hour counter: PRESET H METER
Timers: TIMERS
Counters: PRESET COUNT, UP_DOWN COUNT
CAM block
Special case of SFC components. On restart after a power failure, the positions the status tokens held
in SFCs whose power was cut are:
Lost if the charts did not have a RESET-INIT function
Restored if the charts had a RESET-INIT function
How to Import an Application Developed with Millenium 2 into
Millenium 3
Description
See Conversion of Older Applications Using Millenium 3.
File Location
Description
Once the installation program is executed, all the files needed to execute the programming workshop
are stored in a set of directories described below:
Illustration:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 23 sur 249
This software set is located in the default installation directory, C:\Program files\Millenium 3\.
In this directory may be found the following subdirectories and files:
Programming workshop binary files, including Millenium3.exe, the executable root, and a set of DLL
files corresponding to each of the available tools.
The Lang_X.dll files (where X is the language number) contain all character strings displayed by the
programming workshop (menus, warning/error messages).
The file Infos.env contains all the environment information that can be used to save the appearance
of the HMI on closure of the programming workshop (choice of display options, window positions,
opening or closing of windows) and then to restore it the next time it is opened.
The M3special and M3normal files contain the specific fonts used by the programming software.
Mfc42.dll and Msvcrt.dll are Microsoft libraries.
M3Ctlg: files and directories associated with the catalog, and therefore with the description of the
controllers, their performance and associated extensions, as well as the parameter setting methods.
The catalog file is called M3dc15_ctlg.tM3.
Each file containing the catalog texts displayed in the programming workshop language by the HMI
is called M3TxtCts_X.tM3 where X represents the language number:
X=0 corresponds to French
X=1 to English
X=2 to German
X=3 to Spanish
X=4 to Italian
Finally, there is a set of files used by the programming workshop but unrelated to the catalog. These
are files are like M3TxtCls_X.tm3 where X represents the language number.
These files are used to display in a particular language the help balloons associated with the
standard functions: the function name and names of the inputs and outputs.
M3Dc27: Controller software binary files for the various languages (French, English, German,
Spanish, Italian).
M3Help: Files (Millenium_X.chm where X is the language number) containing the online help
manuals in each language.
M3Readme: README type files specific to the current version of the product and in all languages.
M3User: By default, after installation, all user program files (.pm3 extension) are stored here.
However, the user can impose a specific storage path with the command "Save as" or by selecting a
different "Work directory" using the "Preferences" menu. The user can move all .pm3 files to a
directory of his/her choice.
Functions Accessible from the Front Panel
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
What's in this Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 24 sur 249
Overview of the Functions Accessible from the Front Panel
INPUTS-OUTPUTS Screen
PARAMETERS Menu
ON/OFF Menu
CARTRIDGE Menu
MISCELLANEOUS Menu
Overview of the Functions Accessible from the Front Panel
Description
See How to Control the Controller from the Front Panel.
INPUTS-OUTPUTS Screen
Description
The INPUTS-OUTPUTS screen is displayed by default, when no display function (TEXT or DISPLAY)
is active and regardless of:
The programming type
The mode: OFF or ON
Illustration:
1 State of inputs: 1 to 9, A to P
2 State of outputs: 1 to 9, A to G
3 The time for products with a clock
When the program is in ON, the active states of the Outputs are indicated in reverse video.
Access to the Main Menu
Pressing the OK key switches the display from the INPUTS-OUTPUTS screen to the main menu:
ON/OFF
PARAMETERS
MISCELLANEOUS
Display Functions
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 25 sur 249
The main INPUTS-OUTPUTS screen is replaced by the content of the display functions if a DISPLAY
or TEXT function is active.
If several display functions are active simultaneously, all the blocks are displayed. If there is any
overlap between the fields displayed, the DISPLAY for the highest block number is shown.
Switching Between Screens
It is possible to go from the DISPLAY (FBD) or TEXT (LD or FBD) screen to the INPUTS-OUTPUTS
screen and vice-versa.
To:
proceed as follows:
Display the inputs-outputs screen...
Press and hold down the red ESC key.
Go back to the DISPLAY or TEXT screen...
Release the red ESC key.
PARAMETERS Menu
Description
This menu is used to enter and modify the application parameters directly on the screen using the
controller keys.
If there are parameters authorized for changing they are listed in the window; otherwise a NO
PARAMETERS message appears.
Modification is possible in controller ON and OFF mode .
LD Mode
Functions with parameters in LD mode:
Auxiliary relays (save on power failure),
Discrete outputs (save on power failure),
Clocks,
Timers,
Counters,
Fast counter.
Only those functions used in the program and with parameters are listed in the PARAMETERS menu.
FBD Mode
The FBD functions with modifiable parameters are the following:
Numerical Constant-Type (NUM) Inputs,
Clocks (Time Prog),
Gain,
Timers: TIMER A/C, Timer BW, TIMER B/H, TIMER Li, Totalisers,
Counters: PRESET COUNT,
CAM block,
Preset H-Meter
Only the functions used in the program, which have parameters, and whose Authorized Modification
option is enabled are listed in the PARAMETERS menu.
FBD Mode
The FBD functions with modifiable parameters are the following:
Numerical Constant-Type (NUM) Inputs,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 26 sur 249
Clocks (Time Prog),
Gain,
Timers: TIMER A/C, Timer BW, TIMER B/H, TIMER Li, Totalisers,
Counters: PRESET COUNT,
CAM block,
Preset H-Meter,
Only the functions used in the program, that have parameters, and whose option Authorized
Modification option is enabled are listed in the PARAMETER menu.
Parameter Modification
Parameter modification procedure:
Step
Action
1
Place the cursor over the PARAMETERS menu in the main menu (PARAMETERS flashing) and confirm by
pressing the OK button
.
Result: the parameters window opens to the first parameter.
2
Select the block to modify:
place the cursor over the number of the function block,
press the OK button,
Use the
and
keys to scroll through the function block numbers, until you reach the
right one,
confirm by pressing the OK button.
3
Select the name of the parameter to modify:
place the cursor over the name of the parameter of the function block,
press the OK button,
Use the
and
keys to scroll through the names of the parameters, until you reach the
right one,
confirm by pressing the OK button.
4
Select the value of the parameter to modify:
Place the cursor over the value to modify.
press the OK button,
Use the
and
keys to scroll through the possible values, until you reach the right one,
confirm by pressing the OK button.
5
Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for each to the functions to modify.
6
Press twice on the ESC
button to return to Inputs/Outputs screen.
ON/OFF Menu
Description
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 27 sur 249
This function is used to start or stop the program in the controller:
In OFF mode: The program is stopped and the outputs disabled.
In ON mode (with or without initialization of saved parameters): The program is executed.
Startup
In OFF mode, when the ON/OFF menu is accessed, the interface offers the user the following 3
choices to start the program:
ON: The current values for which the Save on power failure option was activated are maintained.
RESET SAVED VALUES AND START: All current values (counters, timers, etc.) are reset before
the program starts (default selection).
CANCEL: The program is not started.
Illustration:
The navigation keys are used to change the selection.
Off
In ON mode, when the ON/OFF menu is accessed, the interface requests the user to confirm that the
program has stopped.
The green OK key is used to confirm.
The red ESC key is used to cancel.
Controllers Without Screens
For controllers without screens, a green LED located on the controller front panel serves as indicator:
If the LED flashes slowly (3 Hz), the controller is ON (even if there is a non-blocking fault).
If the LED flashes quickly (5 Hz), the controller is OFF with a fault.
If the LED remains on, the controller is powered up and OFF.
Note: On power-up, the controller is ON, except in the event of a blocking fault.
Note: To acknowledge a blocking fault, power down the controller, then power it up again.
CARTRIDGE Menu
Description
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 28 sur 249
This function is used to:
Load the software and the application contained in the controller into the backup memory.
Load software and an application contained in the backup memory into the controller.
This backup memory may then be used to load the software and the application into another controller.
Note: The backup memory is available as an option.
Note: For controllers without a screen, detection of the memory only occurs when the controller is
powered up, if the memory is inserted while the controller is on, it will not be taken into account.
Note: If the application is protected (key icon displayed), the user must enter the password before
being able to save the program.
Note: If an application is already present in the backup memory, it will be overwritten by the new
transfer (no test is performed to check that the memory is free).
Note: It is not possible to transfer an application created with version V2 of the programming
workshop directly from the memory to the controller if the controller contains version 3 software.
Controller → Backup Memory Transfer
Procedure for transferring the application from the controller to the backup memory:
Step
Action
1
Insert the EEPROM cartridge in the slot provided.
2
Select the type of transfer using the
navigation keys:
If restricted access needs to be activated, select BACKUP & PROT.
Otherwise, select BACKUP.
3
Confirm the transfer command with the green OK key.
4
The message Program backup in progress is displayed.
5
Confirm again by pressing the green OK key to exit the menu.
Wait until the message Program backup completed is displayed.
Backup Memory → Controller Transfer
Procedure for transferring the application from the backup memory to the controller, if using a
controller with LCD screen and keyboard:
Step
Action
1
Insert the EEPROM cartridge with the program to be transferred in the slot provided.
2
Select the transfer type: RESTORE using the
3
4
navigation keys.
Confirm the transfer command with the green OK key.
If the application is protected by restricted access, press the red ESC key, until you reach the inputs-outputs
screen so that the restricted access option can be taken into account.
Procedure for transferring the application from the backup memory to the controller, in the event of a
controller without LCD screen or keyboard:
Step
Action
1
As power is not supplied to the controller, insert the EEPROM cartridge in the slot provided.
2
Power up the controller.
During the transfer, the LED display is off.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
3
Page 29 sur 249
Wait for the transfer to end.
During the transfer, the LED display is off, then at the end of the transfer the LED display flashes.
4
If the flashing is slow (3 Hz), the transfer has been performed correctly, the controller is ON, therefore
remove the EEPROM cartridge.
If the flashing is quick (5 Hz), the transfer has not been performed as a result of incompatibility between
the configuration required by the program to transfer and the controller configuration.
Note: When the controller is in OFF mode, the LED display is on and does not flash.
Possible Errors
In the event of a problem or hardware or software incompatibility, the Error during transfer message
is displayed.
Refer to the FAULT Menu chapter to consult the error number and clear it.
Note: Program transfer from one controller to another via a memory card is only possible between
controllers with the same reference. For example, it is impossible to transfer a program originating
from a controller with a clock to a controller that does not have a clock.
Application Incompatible with the Controller Software
Should the application stored in the backup memory have been created with another version of the
programming workshop that is incompatible with the target controller software, proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Download the application from the backup memory to a controller containing compatible software.
Note: If no controller has software compatible with the application, use the version of the programming
workshop which was used to create the application to download software compatible with the target
controller.
2
Use the version of the programming workshop which was used to create the application to download from
the controller to the PC.
3
Save the application downloaded in step 2.
4
Launch the latest version of the programming software.
5
Open the application saved in step 3.
Result: The programming software converts the application.
6
Download the application converted and the associated software to the target controller.
MISCELLANEOUS Menu
At a Glance
Subject of this Chapter
The MISCELLANEOUS menu gives access to the following functions:
VERSION,
CLOCK:
CHANGE DAY/HOUR,
CHANGE SUMMER/WINTER,
FAULT.
This chapter describes the characteristics of these functions.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Note: use the navigation key to return to the main menu
Page 30 sur 249
.
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
VERSION Menu
FAULT Menu
CHANGE DATE/TIME Menu
CHANGE SUMMER/WINTER Menu
VERSION Menu
Description
This function is used to precisely identify the version of each system component:
type of hardware,
controller software (Firmware),
LD functions,
FBD Functions.
Illustration:
This information is available for the controller, but also for the connected extensions.
If the
symbol is present in the bottom right, the controller has one or more connected extensions.
To quit, press the ESC button; the display returns to the screen of the version menu.
FAULT Menu
Description
When a fault is detected by the controller software, an icon appears at the bottom of the screen. The
FAULT menu is used to display the type of fault: error or warning, cycle overflow, basic cycle time too
long, etc.).
Illustration:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 31 sur 249
Description of Errors
See Description of Errors
CHANGE DATE/TIME Menu
Description
This function is used to configure the date and time on controllers that have a clock.
Illustration:
The modifiable parameters are:
Day/month/year
Hour, minutes, seconds
CALIBRAT: Calibration of the controller internal clock in seconds per week
Clock Calibration
The quartz that controls the controller’s real-time clock has a variable monthly drift depending on the
environmental conditions in which the controller is used.
The maximum value for this drift is approximately one minute per month.
To estimate this drift, observe the drift on the controller clock compared to a standard reference clock
for a few weeks or more.
Example:
If you wish to compensate this drift, you can, for example, make a -15 second correction per week to
compensate for a + 60 second drift per month. This compensation is executed on Sunday at one
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 32 sur 249
o'clock in the morning.
Note: This correction will be pointless if the controller is subject to prolonged power failures or to
signification temperature variations.
Clock Configuration
Procedure:
Steps
Description
1
Select the parameter to modify using the navigation keys
and
.
2
Press the green OK key
.
Result: The selected parameter flashes.
3
Modify the parameter value.
The navigation keys
and
are used to change the current value.
4
Confirm your changes by pressing the green OK key
.
Note: The controller contains a software module that determines the day of the week when the user
selects the day of the month in the year.
Note: You are not allowed to modify the time on a product between 02.00 and 03.00 in the morning
on the changeover days from summer to winter time (at 03.00 it is 02.00).
CHANGE SUMMER/WINTER Menu
Description
This function is used to change the daylight saving time automatically (summer/winter) for controllers
with a clock.
Illustration:
The possible operating modes are as follows:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 33 sur 249
DISABLED: no change
Depending on the zone: The change takes place automatically, the dates are preset according to
the geographic zone:
EUROPE, or
USA
MANUAL: The change takes place automatically, but you must specify the date of the change, for
both summer and winter, as follows:
Month: MONTH
Number of the Sunday in the month: Sun no. (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5)
Configuring the Time Change
To configure a time change, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Select the parameter to modify using the navigation keys
and
.
2
Press the green OK key
.
Result: The selected parameter flashes.
3
Modify the parameter value.
The keys
and
are used to change the current value.
4
Confirm your changes by pressing the green OK key
.
LD Language
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
This section describes the use of LD (Ladder Diagram) programming language for the controller
module.
What's in this Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Overview of LD Language
Programming in Ladder
LD Language Elements
Programming from the Software Workshop
Sample LD Application
Overview of LD Language
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 34 sur 249
Overview
Aim of This Chapter
This chapter provides a general description of LD language.
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
General Overview of Ladder Language
Structure of a Ladder Network
Ladder Network Comment
Ladder Language Graphic Elements
Programming Rules for a Ladder Network
General Overview of Ladder Language
Related Topics
General
A section of program written in Ladder Language is made up of a series of ladder networks executed by
the PLC.
Ladder Network Illustration
The following screen shows a ladder network in LADDER data entry mode:
Ladder Network Composition
This table describes the elements that make up a ladder network.
Number
Element
Function
1
Graphic elements
These represent:
The inputs/outputs of the PLC (push-buttons, sensors, relays, LEDs, etc.),
Automation functions (timers, counters, etc.),
Logic operations,
Internal variables (auxiliary relays) of the PLC.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
2
Comments
Page 35 sur 249
For each line of a ladder network (optional).
Structure of a Ladder Network
Related Topics
Introduction
The ladder network is between the first "contact" column (Contact 1) and the "coil" column.
Illustration
The following diagram describes the structure of a ladder network.
Ladder Network Description
A ladder network is made up of a collection of graphic elements set out over a grid with:
A maximum 120 program lines,
Each line comprising a maximum of 5 contacts and a coil.
It is divided into two zones:
The test zone, in which the conditions necessary for triggering an action (contacts) are displayed,
The action zone, which applies the result following a logical test combination (coils).
Definition of an Action
An action is applied to an automation function (timer, counter, etc.), an auxiliary relay or a PLC output.
An action causes a change in state specified for each associated function. For example:
An RT1 action causes a reset of the T1 timer,
An SM1 action causes a set of the M1 auxiliary relay.
Definition of an Automation Function
An automation function (timer, counter, auxiliary relay, etc.) is defined by:
Input data or actions,
Output data or statuses,
Adjustment parameters.
The following diagram shows the structure of a function:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 36 sur 249
Ladder Network Comment
General
A comment, though not mandatory, is assigned to a portion of the ladder network and makes it easier
to interpret.
Comment Associated with an LD Line
The comment is integrated into the network at the end of the line, in the "comment" column, and is
made up of a maximum of 192 characters.
Comment Associated with a Graphic Element
The comment is integrated into the network below the associated graphic element (contact or coil).
Note: For reasons to do with display and printing, it is advisable not to exceed 25 characters.
Illustration
Note: For the column comment associated with a line, the maximum number of characters displayed
varies according to the size of your editing window. The number 192 is given for a full screen
window.
Ladder Language Graphic Elements
General
Graphic elements are ladder language instructions.
Contacts
Graphic elements of the contacts are programmed in the test zone and take up one cell (one row high
by one column wide).
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Name
Page 37 sur 249
Ladder
symbol
Electrical
symbol
Functions
Normally open
contact
Conducting contact when its controlling input (switch, sensor, etc.) is
active.
Normally closed
contact
Conducting contact when its controlling input is inactive.
Linking Elements
Linking graphic elements are used to connect test and action graphic elements.
Name
Graphic
representation
Functions
Horizontal connection
Used to link test and action graphic elements together between the two
potential bars.
Vertical connection
Used to link test and action graphic elements in parallel.
A horizontal connection represents a logical AND. It sends the state of the contact located immediately
to its left to the contact located immediately to its right.
A vertical connection represents the logical OR of the active states of the horizontal connections
located to its left, i.e.:
Inactive if the states of all the horizontal contacts located to the left are inactive,
Active if at least one of the horizontal contacts located to the left is active.
Coils
The graphic elements of the coils are programmed in the action zone and take up one cell (one row
high by one column wide).
Name
Ladder
symbol
Electrical
symbol
Functions
Direct coil
The coil is energized if the contacts to which it is connected
are conducting (contact mode).
Impulse coil
The coil is energized if the contacts to which it is connected
change state (impulse relay mode).
Set or latch coil
The coil is energized once the contacts to which it is connected
are conducting, then stays triggered even if later the contacts
are no longer conducting (SET mode).
Reset or unlatch coil
The coil is deactivated when the contacts to which it is
connected are conducting. It remains inactive even if later the
contacts are no longer conducting (RESET mode).
Note: For upward compatibility, the four types of functions for a given Q output coil or M auxiliary
relay may be used in the same wiring diagram.
Programming Rules for a Ladder Network
Related Topics
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 38 sur 249
General
Ladder networks are programmed using graphic elements, observing the following programming rules.
Programming Rules
The programming of a ladder network must obey the following rules:
Test and action graphic elements each occupy one cell within a network,
All ladder networks end with at least one action (coil) in the final column,
Actions are always located in the coil column,
A coil corresponds to the triggering of an action applied to an automation function (timer, counter,
auxiliary relay, PLC output, etc.),
The status of an automation function may be used as a test (contact). The contact is then
designated by the name of the associated function, for example:
T1 represents the status of the "T1" timer
t1 represents the complementary status of the "T1" timer
Links are read (interpreted) from left to right,
If, in a network, we use an S (Set) action for an automation function (output, auxiliary relay, etc.), it is
generally advisable to use an R (Reset) action for the same function.
Exception: An S action is used without an R action for detecting operating anomalies that can only
be reset on receiving a "RESET-INIT" action from the automation program,
The R (Reset) actions of an automation function always take priority over S (Set) actions applied to
the same function at the same time,
Network tests combine in the same way as an electrical voltage circuit from the left-hand network
column (+V) to the right-hand network column (+0v).
Example of a Ladder Network
The following screen shows an example of a ladder network.
Programming in Ladder
Overview
Aim of This Chapter
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 39 sur 249
This chapter describes simplified examples of the different types of programming in Ladder mode. A
detailed description of these programming types is provided in the following chapters:
LD Functions Accessible from the Front Panel
Programming from the Programming Workshop
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Advice on Structuring LD Programs
Program View
Settings View
Comments View
Advice on Structuring LD Programs
General
It is important to observe certain basic rules in order for the program developed in LD to be legible.
Procedure
The following table describes the phases in creating an LD program
Phase
Description
1
List the Inputs/Outputs and enter any associated comments
Example
Presence of vehicle
Limit switch
Actuator control
2
List the automation functions to be performed
Example
Counting vehicles
Daily programming
3
Perform each function taking into account:
The input data
The output data
The adjustment parameters (threshold)
The diagram below shows the structure of a function:
4
Add a comment to each function
Example:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
5
Page 40 sur 249
Test each function using the simulation tool
An output must generally be activated at a single location in a program.
A Set output must be accompanied by a RESET output.
Check the RESET functions of the timers, counters and text blocks.
Program View
Overview
Using the software workshop in Program view mode allows you to adopt a software-based approach
to programming:
Use of toolbars
Creation of the application by dragging and dropping automation functions
Use of parameter setting windows
Clear overall visibility of the application
In this form, the workspace is made up of a wiring sheet to which the various automation functions are
added.
This approach is designed for people with experience using the programming software workshops
commonly used in the automation world.
Access
The Program view is accessible using the
button.
Description
The figure below shows an example of wiring in Program view mode :
The elements are described in the table below:
Element
Description
Use
1: Function bar
Groups together the available automation function
types.
Click on a type of function to display the table of
available functions.
2: Function type table Shows the functions available for each function:
The list of its outputs (or states)
The list of its inputs (or actions)
The comment associated with the function
Enter comments directly in the Comment column.
Drag the functions from the table to the wiring
sheet.
The color of the first line indicates the place in the
wiring sheet where the function may be placed:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 41 sur 249
White: An output (or state) to a contact column
Green: An input (or action) to the coil column
3 : Symbol
Represents a Ladder symbol or an Electrical
symbol function according to the choice made in
the Display menu.
Double-click on the symbol to open the parameters
window.
4 : Pre-drawn
connection
Used to make a connection on the wiring sheet.
Click with the mouse on the horizontal and/or
vertical pre-drawn connections to draw a
connection.
How to Add, Display, or Hide Comments
The table below describes the possibilities for adding and displaying comments.
Objective
Add a comment
Action(s)
Double-click on the symbol in the wiring sheet.
Select the Comment tab in the parameters window.
Enter the text.
Click on OK.
Display the comments
Click on menu: Display → Comments → All
Hide comments
Click on menu: Display → Comments → None
Result: Each comment is replaced by a small envelope
.
Settings View
Description
The Settings view is used to list all automation functions with parameters used in the application.
The general interface allows the user to view all the information:
Function: Timer, Counter, etc.
Label: Function block ID
Type: Counter type, timer type, etc. ,
Preset: The target alue for a counter, etc.
Modif: Indicates whether or not parameter modification is possible from the controller front panel
Comment: Comments associated with the function
Position: Position on the wiring sheet
Illustration:
To adjust the various parameters, double-click on the desired line.
The configurable automation functions are:
Clocks
Timers
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 42 sur 249
Counters
Texts
Access
The Settings view is accessible using the
button.
Comments View
Description
Comments View allows you to have an overall view of the inputs/outputs used in the application.
It is important to identify each input/output with an explicit comment, in order to make the application as
clear as possible.
This mode applies to:
Discrete inputs
A/B keys
Discrete outputs
Auxiliary relays
Timers
Counters
High-speed counters
Counter comparators
Clocks
Text blocks
LCD backlighting
Summer Winter
You can display used blocks only in the window, using the drop-down window below the edit zone.
Illustration:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 43 sur 249
Comments will be displayed under the contact or coil when viewing the program in the following
configuration:
The comment is integrated in the rung below the associated graphic element (contact or coil).
Note: For reasons to do with display and printing, it is advisable to not exceed 25 characters.
Illustration:
Access
Comments view can be accessed using the
button.
Entering/Modifying Comments
To enter or modify comments, double-click on the comments zone, enter the text and confirm.
LD Language Elements
At a Glance
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the different automation functions of the LD language.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 44 sur 249
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Discrete Inputs
Discrete (DISCR) Outputs
Modbus I/O
Auxiliary Relays
A/B Keys
Counters
Counter Comparator
High-Speed Counter
Clocks
Change to Summer / Winter Time
Timers
Texts
LCD Screen Backlighting
Message
Discrete Inputs
Description
Discrete inputs can be used exclusively as contacts in the program.
These contacts represent the status of the input of the controller connected to a sensor (pushbutton,
switch, sensor, etc.).
The contact number corresponds to the number of terminals of the associated input: 1 to 9, then A to R
(except for letters I, M and O) according to the controller and any possible extension.
Access
This
function is accessible from the LD function bar.
Use as a Contact
This contact may use the direct state of the input (normally open mode) or its inverse state (normally
closed mode), see below.
Normally open mode:
Symbol of a normally open
contact:
A normally open contact corresponds to the use of the direct state of the input. If the input is supplied,
the contact is said to be conducting.
For example: Switching a lamp on and off with a pushbutton.
If input 1 is powered, contact I1 is closed, and coil Q1 is activated.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 45 sur 249
Normally closed mode:
Symbol of a normally closed
contact:
A normally closed contact corresponds to the use of the reverse state (logical complement of the direct
state) of the input. If the input is supplied, the contact is said to be non-conducting.
For example: Controlling a lamp using an input in reverse state.
If input 1 is supplied, contact i1 is open, and coil Q1 is non-activated.
Modification of the Mode of a Contact
In the programming software, to modify the mode of a contact, simply position the cursor on it, then:
With the mouse: Right-click to display a list of possible states (left-click to validate),
With the space bar: Scroll through all possible states.
Initialization
Status of contacts on program initialization:
The direct state is inactive,
The reverse state is active.
Discrete (DISCR) Outputs
Description
Discrete outputs correspond to the controller output relay coils (connected to the actuators). These
outputs are numbered from 1 to 9, then from A to G, according to the controller and any extensions.
Any Discrete output may be used, in the program, either as a coil or a contact.
Access
This
function is accessible from the LD function bar.
Use as a Coil
To use a Discrete output as a coil, four modes are available:
Contactor mode,
Impulse relay mode,
Latch mode,
Unlatch mode.
Contactor mode:
Symbol of a Discrete output, used as a coil in contactor
mode:
The coil is energized if the contacts to which it is connected are conducting. Otherwise it is not
energized.
Impulse relay mode:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 46 sur 249
Symbol of a Discrete output, used as a coil in impulse relay
mode:
Pulse energization, the coil changes state on each pulse it receives.
For example: Switching a lamp on and off with a pushbutton:
A push button is connected to input I1 and a lamp to output Q1. Every time the button is pressed, the
lamp switches on or off.
Latch mode:
Symbol of a Discrete output, used as a coil in latch
mode:
The Set coil, also called the latch coil, is energized as soon as the contacts to which it is connected are
conducting, then stays set even if later the contacts are no longer conducting.
This behavior is identical to that of an RS logic flip-flop.
For example: Switching a lamp on and off using two pushbuttons: See Latching Mode below.
Unlatch mode:
Symbol of a Discrete output, used as a coil in latch
mode:
The RESET coil, also called the unlatch coil, is deactivated when the contacts to which it is connected
are conducting. It remains inactive even if later the contacts are no longer conducting.
For example: Switching a lamp on and off using two pushbuttons: See Unlatch Mode
BPI1 is connected to input I1 and BPI2 is connected to input I2. The lamp is controlled by output Q1.
The lamp turns on when pushbutton BPI1 is pressed, and it turns off when pushbutton BPI2 is pressed.
Note: Rule for using outputs:
An output must only be used at one single point in the program as a coil.
If a SET coil is used for a Discrete output, it is advisable to provide a RESET coil for this output.
The RESET coil takes priority over the SET coil.
The use of a Set coil alone is only justified for activating an alarm signal that can be reset only by
an INIT + ON action from the program.
Note: For upward compatibility, the four types of modes for a given Q output coil or M auxiliary relay
may be used in the same wiring diagram.
In this case, the operating mode is determined by the first activated coil.
Use as a Contact
An output can be used as an auxiliary contact as many times as necessary.
This contact may use the direct state of the output (normally open mode) or its inverse state (normally
closed mode), see below.
Normally open mode:
Symbol of a Discrete output, used as a contact in normally open mode:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 47 sur 249
mode:
An output used as a normally open auxiliary contact corresponds to the use of the direct state of the
output. If it is powered, the contact is said to be conducting.
Normally closed mode:
Symbol of a Discrete output, used as a contact in normally closed
mode:
An output used as a normally closed auxiliary contact corresponds to the use of the reverse state
(logical complement of the direct state) of the output. If it is powered, the contact is said to be nonconducting.
Modification of the Mode of a Coil or a Contact
In the programming software, to modify the mode of a coil or a contact, simply position the cursor on
the element then:
With the mouse: Right-click to display a list of possible states (left-click to validate),
With the space bar: Scroll through all possible states.
Initialization
Status of contacts on program initialization:
Normally open mode (direct state) is inactive,
Normally closed mode (reverse state) is active.
Save on Power Failure
By default, after a power failure, the relay is in the state that corresponds to program initialization.
To restore the state of the output backed up on a power failure, it is essential to enable save on power
failure.
From the front panel: From the PARAMETER window,
or
In the programming software: Enable the Save on power failure option in the parameters window
associated with the output.
Modbus I/O
Description
A Modbus XN03 24VDC extension module can be added to an expandable controller.
In LD mode, the application cannot access the four 16-bit data exchange words. Data transfer between
master and slave is implicit and completely transparent.
Note: The Modbus extension only operates in Modbus slave mode.
Parameters
The Modbus module parameters can be only be set in the programming workshop.
To access the Modbus module parameters, click on the XN03 24VDC button.
When changing to ON mode, the controller initializes the Modbus extension.
The Modbus module has 4 parameters:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 48 sur 249
The number of wires and frame format on the Modbus network
The data transmission speed in bauds
The protocol parity
The slave Modbus extension network address
Words to be Sent to the Master
The words to be sent to the master are automatically written by duplicating the state of the discrete I/O
as follows:
I1 to IG: State of the discrete inputs on the base.
IH to IR: State of the discrete inputs on the extension.
O1 to OA: State of the discrete outputs on the base.
OB to OG: State of the discrete outputs on the extension.
Words Sent by the Master
The words sent by the master are not processed by the controller.
The addresses (Hex) for these four 16-bit words are as follows: 0x0010 / 0x0011 / 0x0012 / 0x0013.
Auxiliary Relays
Description
Auxiliary relays marked M behave in exactly the same way as O Discrete outputs (see Discrete
(DISCR) Outputs), but do not have an electrical output contact. They can be used as internal variables.
There are 31, numbered from 1 to 9 and from A to Y except for letters I, M, O.
Any auxiliary relay may be used, in the program, indifferently as coil or contact. They are used to
memorize a state that will be used as the associated contact.
Access
This
function is accessible from the LD function bar.
Use as a Coil
To use an auxiliary relay as a coil, 4 modes are available:
Contactor mode,
Impulse relay mode,
Latch mode,
Unlatch mode.
Contactor mode:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 49 sur 249
Symbol of an auxiliary relay, used as a coil in contactor
mode:
The relay is energized if the contacts to which it is connected are conducting. Otherwise it is not
energized.
Impulse relay mode:
Symbol of an auxiliary relay, used as a coil in impulse relay
mode:
Pulse energization, the coil changes state on each pulse it receives.
Latch mode:
Symbol of an auxiliary relay, used as a coil in latch
mode:
The SET relay, also called the latch relay, is energized as soon as the contacts to which it is connected
are conducting, then stays set even if later the contacts are no longer conducting.
This behavior is identical to that of an RS logic flip-flop.
Unlatch mode:
Symbol of an auxiliary relay, used as a coil in latch
mode:
The RESET relay, also called the unlatch relay, is deactivated when the contacts to which it is
connected are conducting. It remains deactivated even if later the contacts are no longer conducting.
Note: For upward compatibility, the 4 types of modes for a given Q output coil or M auxiliary relay
may be used in the same wiring diagram.
Use as a Contact
Auxiliary relays may be used as contacts as many times as necessary.
This contact may use the direct state of the relay (normally open mode) or its inverse state (normally
closed mode), see below.
Normally open mode:
Symbol of an auxiliary relay, used as a contact in normally open
mode:
A relay used as normally open contact corresponds to the use of the direct state of the relay. If it is
powered, the contact is said to be conducting.
Normally closed mode:
Symbol of an auxiliary relay, used as a contact in normally closed
mode:
An auxiliary relay used as a normally closed contact, corresponds to the use of the reverse state
(logical complement of the direct state) of the relay. If it is powered, the contact is said to be nonconducting.
Example
In the following example turning on and off a lamp is conditioned by the status of the 6 following inputs:
I1, I2, I3, I4, I5 and IB.
The is on when:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 50 sur 249
The I1, I4, I5 and IB inputs are set to the state 1,
and
The I2, I3 are set to state 0.
Because the controller does not allow more than 5 contacts on a line, auxiliary relays are used to
control the lamp.
You choose to memorize the state of inputs I1, I4, I5 and IB using the auxiliary relay M1 and memorize
the state of inputs I2 and I3 using the auxiliary relay M2. The lamp is controlled by relays M1 and M2,
used respectively as normally open contact and as normally closed contact.
Illustration:
Modification of the Mode of a Coil or a Contact
In the programming software, to modify the mode of a coil or a contact, simply position the cursor on
the element then:
With the mouse: Right-click to display a list of possible states (left-click to validate),
With the space bar: Scroll through all possible states.
Initialization
Status of contacts on program initialization:
Normally open mode (direct state) is inactive,
Normally closed mode (reverse state) is active.
Save on power failure
By default, after a power failure, the relay is in the state that corresponds to program initialization.
To restore the state of the output backed up on a power failure, it is essential to enable save on power
failure.
From the front panel: From the PARAMETER window,
or
In the programming software: Enable the Save on power failure option in the parameters window
associated with the relay.
A/B Keys
Description
The A and B keys behave exactly like the I physical inputs (Discrete inputs). The only difference is that
they do not correspond to the controller's connection terminals, but to the gray A and B buttons on the
front panel.
They are used as pushbuttons, and can only be used as contacts.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 51 sur 249
Access
This
function is accessible from the LD function bar.
Use as a Contact
This contact may use the direct state of the key (normally open mode) or its inverse state (normally
closed mode), see below.
Normally open mode:
Symbol of the normally open contact, representing a
key:
The normally open mode corresponds to the use of the direct state of the key. If the key is pressed,
the corresponding input is said to be conducting.
Normally closed mode:
Symbol of the normally closed contact, representing a
key:
The normally closed mode corresponds to the use of the reverse state (logical complement of the
direct state) of the key. If the key is pressed, the corresponding input is said to be non-conducting.
Example
Creating an impulse relay operated by the A key and the O1 output:
Each time the A key is pressed, the O1 output changes state.
Modification of the Mode of a Contact
In the programming software, to modify the mode of a contact, simply position the cursor on it, then:
With the mouse: Right-click to display a list of possible states (left-click to confirm),
With the space bar: Scroll through all possible states.
Initialization
Status of contacts on program initialization:
Normally open mode (direct state) is inactive,
Normally closed mode (reverse state) is active.
Counters
Description
The Counter function is used to upcount or downcount pulses. The controller has 16 counters,
numbered from 1 to 9 then from A to G.
The Counter function can be reset to zero or to the preset value (depending on the chosen parameter)
during use.
It can be used as a contact to find out whether:
The preset value has been reached (TO upcounting mode)
The counter has reached 0 (FROM downcounting mode)
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 52 sur 249
Access
This
function is accessible from the LD function bar.
Use of Coils
Each counter has 3 associated coils:
CC coil: Counting pulse input
RC coil: Reset initial counter state input
DC coil: Counting direction input
The use of these coils is described below.
Counting pulse input:
Symbol for the Counting pulse input coil of a
counter:
When used as a coil in a control diagram, this element represents a counter input for the function.
Every time the coil is energized, the counter is incremented or decremented by 1 according to the
chosen counting direction.
Example: Counting pulses delivered by the input by counter no. 1.
Every time input I1 is energized, the counter no. 1 is incremented by 1.
Reset initial state input:
Symbol for the Reset initial counter state input coil:
When used as a coil in a control diagram, this element represents an input that resets the counter
function to its initial state.
Energizing the coil has the following effect:
Resets the current counter value to zero if the count type is TO (upcounting from the preset value).
Reset the current value to the preset value if the count type is FROM (downcounting from the
preset value).
Example: Counter No.1 reset to zero on pressing key A.
Every time key A is pressed, the counter starts from 0.
Counting direction input:
Symbol for the Counting direction input coil of a
counter:
This input determines the counting direction according to its state. The counter:
Downcounts if the coil is energized.
Upcounts if the coil is not energized.
Note: By default, if this input is not hard-wired, the automation function upcounts.
Example: Up/downcounting, depending on the state of controller input I2.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 53 sur 249
If input I2 is active, the automation function downcounts.
Use as a Contact
The contact associated with the high-speed counter indicates whether the preset value (TO mode) or
zero (FROM mode) has been reached.
It can be used as many times as necessary in the program. It can be used in one of 2 modes: normally
open or normally closed, described below.
Normally open mode:
Symbol of the normally open contact associated with a
counter:
This contact is conducting when:
The current counter value has reached the preset value, if the counter is in TO mode (upcounting
mode).
The current counter value is equal to 0, if the counter is in FROM mode (downcounting mode).
Normally closed mode:
Symbol of the normally closed contact associated with a
counter:
The contact is conducting as long as :
The current counter value has not reached the preset value, if the counter is in TO mode
(upcounting mode).
the current counter value does not equal 0, if the counter is in FROM mode (downcounting mode).
Example: Lighting an LED connected to the counter No. 1 output (TO mode).
When the preset value has been reached: the LED is lit; otherwise it is off.
Parameter Setting from the Programming Workshop
Pulses:
This value is between 0 and 32767 (preset value).
Type of counting:
Two modes are available:
Upcounting to the preset value: incrementation of the current counter value
Downcounting from the preset value: decrementation of the current counter value
Save on power failure:
By default, after a power cut, the counter is set to the state that corresponds to program initialization.
To restore the counter status that is saved on power failure, it is essential to check the Enable save on
power failure option.
Modification authorized:
By default, parameters can only be modified from the controller front panel.
To be able to modify parameters from the controller front panel using the PARAMETERS menu, check
the Modification authorized option.
Parameter Setting from the Front Panel
The block parameters can be accessed and set from the PARAMETERS menu if the Modification
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 54 sur 249
authorized option has been selected.
The only modifiable parameter is the Counting setpoint, i.e. the value up to or down from which the
counter counts.
Current Counter Value
The current counter value is the value at any given time resulting from the successive up/downcounting
actions that have occurred since the last time the counter was reset to its initial state.
This value is between 0 and 32767. Once these values have been reached, downcounting will leave
the current value at 0 and upcounting will leave the current value at + 32767.
Timing Diagrams
In the timing diagrams below the blue curves represent the current counter value:
The figure below shows the counter operation in upcounting to the preset value mode: TO mode:
The figure below shows the counter operation in downcounting from the preset value mode: FROM
mode:
Modifying the Mode of a Coil or a Contact
In the programming workshop, to modify the mode of a coil or a contact, simply position the cursor on
the element then:
With the mouse: Right-click to display a list of possible modes (left-click to confirm)
With the space bar: scroll through all possible states
Initialization
State of the contacts and current value on initialization of the program:
The normally open mode (direct state) is inactive
The normally closed mode (inverse state) is active
The current value is zero
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 55 sur 249
Examples
Below, three simple examples of use of a counter (configured in upcounting to the preset value mode):
Screen
Description
Upcounting and resetting:
The counter is incremented each time input I1 is activated.
The counter is reset each time input I2 is activated.
Downcounting and resetting:
The counter is decremented each time input I1 is activated.
The counter is reset each time input I2 is activated.
Upcounting, downcounting and resetting:
The counter is incremented each time input I1 is activated. The counter is
decremented each time input I3 is activated.
The counter is reset each time input I2 is activated.
Counter Comparator
Description
This function is used to compare the current counter values of two counters or of a counter and a
constant value.
Note: The Counter comparator function block can only be configured from the programming
workshop in Program view mode.
Access
This
function is accessible from the LD function bar.
Use as a Contact
The counter comparator indicates whether the chosen condition has been verified. It is used as a
contact, in normally open mode or in normally closed mode.
Normally open mode:
Counter comparator symbol, in normally open
mode:
The contact is conducting when the condition has been verified.
Normally closed mode:
Counter comparator symbol, in normally closed
mode:
The contact is conducting when the condition has not been verified.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 56 sur 249
Parameter Setting from the Programming Workshop
The different parameters to fill in are the following:
Comparison formula
Parameter modification authorized
Comparison formula:
The comparison formula is as follows:
Where:
Cx and Cy: Represent the counters to compare; these are selected from the associated drop-down
menu
x and y: These are constants (offset) between: - 32,768 and 32,767
The comparison operators that may be chosen are the following:
Symbol
Description
>
Greater than.
≥
Greater than or equal to.
=
Equal to.
≠
Different.
≤
Less than or equal to.
<
Less than.
Modification authorized:
By default, parameters can only be modified from the controller front panel.
To be able to modify parameters from the controller using the PARAMETERS menu, check the
Modification authorized option.
Modifying the Mode of a Coil or a Contact
In the programming workshop, to modify the mode of a contact, simply position the cursor on it, then:
With the mouse: Right-click to display a list of possible states (left-click to confirm)
With the space bar: Scroll through all possible states
Initialization
State of contacts on program initialization:
Normally open mode (direct state) is inactive
Normally closed mode (reverse state) is active
High-Speed Counter
Description
The High-speed counter function is used to count pulses up to a frequency of 1 kHz.
Use of the H1 contact indicates whether:
The preset value has been reached (upcounting)
The counter has reached 0 (downcounting)
The high-speed counter inputs are implicitly connected to controller inputs I1 and I2:
A pulse (rising edge) on input I1 increments the counter.
A pulse (rising edge) on input I2 decrements the counter.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 57 sur 249
These inputs should not be used on the wiring sheet.
The High-speed counter function can be reinitialized during use by the RH1 coil. It is reset to:
0 if it is in upcount to the preset value mode
the preset value if it is in downcount from the preset value mode
The counter only operates if the TH1 confirmation coil is active.
Repetitive mode can be used with a time-delay value.
Note: Limit overrun:
If the current counter value exceeds the upper limit: + 32,767, it is set to - 32,768
If the current counter value exceeds the lower limit: + 32,767, it is set to - 32,768
Note: This function block cannot be simulated.
Access
This
function is accessible from the LD function bar.
Use of Coils
Two coils are associated with the high-speed counter:
Coil TH1: Enable function input
Coil RH1: Reset initial counter state input
The use of these coils is described below.
Enable function input:
Symbol for the Enable function input coil of the high-speed
counter:
This element is used to confirm the count. When this coil is active, each pulse on input I1 will increment
the high-speed counter and each pulse on input I2 will decrement it.
Reset initial counter state input:
Symbol for the Reset initial counter state input:
This input represents the reset to initial state input of the counter function.
Energizing the coil has the following effect:
Resets the current count value to zero if the count type is Upcount to the preset value
Resets the current value to the preset value if the count type is Downcount from the preset value
Example: High-speed counter reinitialized by pressing key A:
Each time the Z1 key is pressed, the counter is reset.
Use as a Contact
The contact associated with the high-speed counter indicates whether the preset value (Upcount to
the preset value mode) or zero (Downcount from the preset value mode) has been reached.
It can be used as many times as necessary in the program. It can be used in one of 2 modes: normally
open or normally closed, described below.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 58 sur 249
Normally open mode:
Symbol for the normally open contact associated with the high-speed
counter
The contact is conducting when:
The current counter value has reached the preset value (Upcount to the preset value mode)
The current counter value has reached the value 0 (Downcount = from the preset value mode)
Normally closed mode:
Symbol for the normally closed contact associated with the high-speed
counter:
The contact is conducting as long as the counter has not reached its preset value.
The contact is conducting as long as :
The current counter value has not reached the preset value, if the counter is in Upcount to the
preset value mode
The current counter value has not reached 0, if the counter is in Downcount from the preset
value mode
Example: Lighting an LED connected to the high-speed counter output
When the preset value has been reached: The LED is lit; otherwise it is off.
Parameter Setting from the Programming Workshop
Type of counting:
Two modes are available:
Upcount to the preset value: upcounting towards the preset value.
When the current counter value is greater than or equal to the preset value, contact K1 of the highspeed counter is conducting.
Downcount from the preset value: downcounting from the preset value.
When the current counter value is less than or equal to 0, contact C of the counter is conducting.
Preset:
This value is between 0 and 32,767, and is the preset value.
Cycle type:
Two modes are available:
Single Cycle: the current counter value changes continually.
The output is activated when the current value is greater than the preset value (upcounting mode) or
when the current value is less than the preset value (downcounting mode).
Repetitive Cycle: The current counter value is reinitialized during counting when it reaches the
preset value (upcounting mode) or 0 (downcounting mode).
The output is enabled following this reinitialization and remains active during a period of time that
can be configured with the parameter: pulse duration (from 1 to 32,767 times 100 ms).
Save on power failure:
By default, after a power cut, the counter is set to the state that corresponds to program initialization.
To restore the counter status that is saved on power failure, it is essential to enable save on power
failure.
Modification authorized:
By default, parameters can only be modified from the controller front panel.
To be able to modify parameters from the controller front panel using the PARAMETERS menu, check
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 59 sur 249
the Modification authorized option.
Parameter Setting from the Front Panel
The block parameters can be accessed and set from the PARAMETERS menu if the Modification
authorized option has been selected.
The modifiable parameters are as follows:
Preset value
Pulse duration (if the Repetitive Cycle option has been selected)
Preset Value:
Symbol for the Preset value
parameter:
This value is between 0 and 32,767, and represents:
The target value in upcounting to the preset value mode (Upcount to the preset value mode)
The initial value in downcounting from the preset value mode (Downcount from the preset value
mode)
Pulse duration:
Symbol for the Pulse Duration
parameter:
This parameter is only displayed if the cycle is repetitive. It determines the time during which the highspeed counter remains active when the current counter value reaches the preset value (when it is in
Upcount to the preset value mode), or when it reaches the value zero (when it is in Downcount from
the preset value mode).
This value must be between 1 and 32,767 (x 100 ms).
Current Counter Value
Value at any given instant resulting from successive up/downcounts since the last counter reset to its
initial state.
If the current counter value exceeds the upper limit: +32,767, it is set to -32,768.
If the current counter value exceeds the lower limit: -32,767, it is set to +32,768.
Timing Diagrams
Timing diagrams are provided here to illustrate the various behaviors of the high-speed counter
according to its configuration:
Upcounting function, Upcount to the preset value, in single cycle mode
Downcounting function, Downcount from the preset value, in single cycle mode
Upcounting function, Upcount to the preset value, in repetitive cycle mode
Downcounting function, Downcount from the preset value, in repetitive cycle mode
In the following 4 graphics, the blue curve represents the current counter value. When it increases, it is
because of pulses on I1 and when it decreases, it is because of pulses on I2.
Upcounting function in single cycle mode:
The figure below illustrates counter operation in upcounting and single cycle mode:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 60 sur 249
Downcounting function in single cycle mode:
The figure below illustrates counter operation in downcounting and single cycle mode:
Upcounting function in repetitive cycle mode:
The figure below illustrates counter operation in upcounting and repetitive cycle mode:
The output switches to the Inactive state when the predefined pulse duration has expired. If the switch
condition is Active before the switch to the Inactive state, the output pulse is extended by the pulse
duration (Time delay).
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 61 sur 249
Downcounting function in repetitive cycle mode:
The figure below illustrates counter operation in downcounting and repetitive cycle mode:
The output switches to the Inactive state when the predefined pulse duration has expired. If the switch
condition is Active before the switch to the Inactive state, the output pulse is extended by the pulse
duration (Time delay).
Modifying the Mode of a Coil or a Contact
In the programming workshop, to modify the mode of a coil or a contact, simply position the cursor on
the element then:
With the mouse: Right-click to display a list of possible states (left-click to confirm)
With the space bar: Scroll through all possible states
Initialization
State of the contacts and current value on initialization of the program:
The normally open mode (direct state) is inactive
The normally closed mode (inverse state) is active
The current value is zero
Example
Below is an example of using a high-speed counter: Output Q1 is set to 1 when the high-speed counter
is set to 1; the counter is activated by input I3 and reset to 0 by input I4.
Clocks
Description
The Clocks or Time Prog function is used to confirm the time slots when actions may be executed.
The controller has 8 Clock function blocks numbered from 1 to 8. Each has 8 programming cycles
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 62 sur 249
numbered from 1 to 8. The Clock function blocks are used as contacts.
Access
This
function is accessible from the LD function bar.
Use as a Contact
This contact can use the direct state of the Clock function block (normally open mode) or its inverse
state (normally closed mode), see below.
Normally open mode:
Symbol for the normally open contact, representing a
clock:
The contact is conducting when the clock is in a valid period.
Normally closed mode:
Symbol for the normally closed contact, representing a
clock:
The contact is conducting when the clock is not in a valid period.
Parameter Setting
Parameter setting is described in the following paragraphs:
Parameters
Modification from the front panel
Change to Summer / Winter Time
Description
The output of this function is in OFF state for the entire duration of winter time, and switches to ON for
the entire duration of summer time.
By default, there is no change in winter / summer time. This function must be activated, either from the
programming software, or from the front panel of the controller.
To activate this function, from the programming software, proceed as follows:
Display the Program Configuration window: menu: Edit → Program Configuration,
select the Date format tab,
Check the Activate Summer/Winter Time Change box,
Define the dates when the time change takes place:
Either using one of the predefined geographic zones,
Or by manually configuring the date (month/Sunday).
To activate this function from the front panel of the controller, proceed as described in chapter
CHANGE SUMMER/WINTER Menu.
Note: This function is only available for controllers that contain a real-time clock.
Access
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
This
Page 63 sur 249
function is accessible from the LD function bar.
Use as a Contact
When used as a contact, this element indicates the current season.
It may be used as many times as necessary in the program. It may be used according to 2 modes:
normally open or normally closed, described below.
Normally open mode:
Symbol of the normally open contact associated with a Change summer / winter time function
block:
The contact is active for the entire duration of summer time.
Normally closed mode:
Symbol of the normally closed contact associated with a Change summer/winter time function
block
The contact is active for the entire duration of winter time.
Parameters
The following operating modes are possible:
No: no change,
Automatic change: Dates are preset according to geographic zone:
EUROPE: Europe,
GB: Great Britain,
USA.
OTHER ZONE: The change is automatic, but you must specify the month: M and the Sunday: S (1,
2, 3, 4 or 5) on which the summer/winter change takes place.
Modification of the Mode of a Coil or a Contact
In the programming software, to modify the mode of a contact, simply position the cursor on it, then:
With the mouse: Right-click to display a list of possible states (left-click to validate),
With the space bar: Scroll through all possible states.
Initialization
State of the contacts and current value on initialization of the program:
the normally open mode (direct state) is inactive,
The normally closed mode (inverse state) is active.
Timers
Overview
The TIMERS function block provides access to the following types of timer:
Timer A/C is used to delay or prolong actions over a predetermined time:
Function A: Timer on-delay
Function C: Timer off-delay
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 64 sur 249
Function A-C: Combination of functions A and C
Timer BW is used to create a pulse for the duration of a cycle on the output from an input edge.
Timer Li is used to create flashing (the durations of on and off states may be configured):
Function Li: The flashing cycle starts with an ON state.
Function L: The flashing cycle starts with an OFF state.
Timer B/H creates a pulse on the output of the rising edge of the input:
Function B: Regardless of the duration of the command pulse, the output is active for a duration
that has been set.
Function H: The output is inactive at the end of a set time or on the falling edge of the command.
The totaliser creates a pulse on the output period during which the input was active reaches (one or
more times) a set value.
Access
This
function is accessible from the LD function bar.
Use of Coils
Each timer has two associated coils:
TT coil: Command input
RC coil: Reset input
The use of these coils is described below.
Command input:
Symbol for the Command input coil of a
timer:
Each type involves a specific operation, which can be used to manage all the possible scenarios in an
application.
Reset input:
Symbol for the Command input coil of a
timer:
Energization of the coil causes a reset of the current timer value: contact T is deactivated and the
function is ready for a new timer cycle.
Note: This coil is only necessary for pulsed on/off type timers.
Use as a Contact
The contact associated with the timer indicates whether the timer has stopped.
It can be used as many times as necessary in the program. It can be used in one of 2 modes - normally
open or normally closed - described below.
Normally open mode:
Symbol for the normally open contact associated with a
timer:
The normally open contact corresponds to use of the direct state of the Timer function block output. If
this output is active, the contact is said to be conducting.
Normally closed mode:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 65 sur 249
Symbol for the normally closed contact associated with a
timer:
The normally closed contact corresponds to use of the reverse state (logical complement of the direct
state) of the Timer function block output. If this output is active, the contact is said to be nonconducting.
How to Choose the Timer
To place a timer on the wiring sheet and select its type, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Click on the
icon of the FBD function bar, then click on a contact or coil box and, holding down the
mouse button, drag it to the desired location.
Result: The following window
appears:
2
Select the desired type of timer from the 5 types available in this window.
Parameter Setting
Timer settings are described in the following sections:
Timer A-C
Timer BW
Timer Li
Timer B/H
Totaliser
Timing Diagrams
Timing diagrams are described in the following sections:
Timer A-C
Timer Li
Timer B/H
Totaliser
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 66 sur 249
Modifying the Mode of a Coil or a Contact
In the programming workshop, to modify the mode of a coil or a contact, simply position the cursor on
the element then:
With the mouse: Right-click to display a list of possible states (left-click to confirm)
With the space bar: Scroll through all possible states
Initialization
State of the contacts and current values on initialization of the program:
The normally open mode (direct state) is inactive
The normally closed mode (inverse state) is active
the current value(s) is (are) zero
Example
Creating a timer device for a stairwell.
The stairwell light should remain on for two minutes and thirty seconds when one of the pushbuttons is
activated.
On each floor, the buttons are connected to controller input I1.
The stairwell light is connected to the controller output O4.
You would therefore write the following program:
To achieve the desired operation, you should use a B/H-type timer and set the time delay duration at
2 minutes 30 seconds.
Texts
Description
The Text automation function is used to display texts or numerical values (current value, preset value,
etc.) on the LCD display instead of the INPUTS-OUTPUTS screen:
The controller has 16 Text blocks, numbered from 1 to 9 then from A to G. These function blocks are
used as coils.
Up to 16 text blocks (TX1 to TXG) can be used simultaneously in one program, but only the block with
the highest number is displayed.
Pressing the greenOK and red ESC keys simultaneously replaces the display on the TEXT screen with
the menu display.
Pressing the ESC key again returns the display to the TEXT screen.
Access
This
function is accessible from the LD function bar.
Use as a Coil
Two coils are associated with each Text block:
Activate display coil
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 67 sur 249
Deactivate display coil
The use of these coils is described below.
Activate display
Symbol for the Activate display of a Text function block
coil:
This coil displays on the screen the text and/or values of the associated Text block when the contacts
connected to it are conducting.
Deactivate display
Symbol for the Deactivate display of a Text function block
coil:
This coil deactivates the display of the text and/or values of the associated Text block when the
contacts connected to it are conducting. The display returns to the INPUTS-OUTPUTS screen.
Example:
Activation of input I1 displays the text on the LCD. Activating input I2 makes the text disappear.
Text Block Identification
Each display function is identified by a current text number (TX1 to TXG).
This identifier can be found in the parameter setting window, in the Parameters tab: the number is in
the drop-down menu at the top of the window.
The parameter setting window opens by default on the function block number from which the dialog box
is opened (double-click).
Character String Display
When the parameter setting window for a new text box is opened, the cursor is positioned over the first
flashing box.
The cursor is positioned at the start of the string to be displayed in the window:
By left-clicking on the box (which then flashes)
By using the arrow keys on the PC keyboard
Description of the entry procedure:
Step
Action
1
Position the cursor at the start of the text.
2
Type the text to be displayed using the keyboard.
3
Confirm by clicking OK.
Result: The new Text block is saved and the parameter setting window is closed.
Note: The character string is limited to one line. If the user continues to enter characters, each
additional character overwrites the one in the last box.
Note: Both ASCII-standard characters and accented characters can be used. Characters and
symbols that are not displayed in the data entry window when keyed are not supported.
Note: If the text entered on a line covers an existing numerical value, the latter is deleted.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 68 sur 249
If a numerical value is positioned over text that has already been entered, the characters it covers
are overwritten.
Displaying a Numerical Value
Positioning:
To position the value on the line, simply drag and drop it to the edit window.
Selection:
The value to be displayed is selected in the window located above the edit window.
This window lists the following elements:
Date: The current value of the internal date (day.month.year) of the device on which the program is
running (controller or simulator)
Time: The current internal time value (hours:minutes)
Calibration: Drift value of the controller’s internal clock
Values (current, preset, etc.) belonging to one of the function blocks used in the current diagram.
For counters, the values displayed are as follows:
Counter type
Value to be displayed
Identifier in the TEXT function
LI timer
On time
T1 Current A
Off time
T1 Current B
No./duration of flashing:
T1 Current C
Preset on time
T1 Preset A
Preset off time
T1 Preset B
No./duration of flashing:
T1 Preset C
On time
T1 Current A
Off time
T1 Current B
Preset on time
T1 Preset A
Preset off time
T1 Preset B
On time
T1 Current A
Preset on time
T1 Preset A
On time
T1 Current A
Preset on time
T1 Preset A
Timer AC
Timer BH
Totaliser timer
Modification authorized:
All the parameters for which the Modification authorized option has been enabled (displayed in green
in the edit window of the Parameters tab), can be modified from the controller front panel (modifiable
values flash).
Clear Text
Description of the procedure:
Step
Description
1
Activate the zone to be cleared.
With the mouse: Left-click, move the mouse pointer over the zone to be selected, holding down the left
mouse button, then release the button.
Result: The selected zone flashes.
2
Clear using the Clear key on the keyboard.
How to Modify Data from the Front Panel
When the Modification authorized option is checked, it is possible to modify the data displayed
directly from the Text screen using the following procedure:
Step
Action
1
Use the
and
keys to place the cursor on the data to modify.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 69 sur 249
2
Confirm by pressing the OK key
.
Result: The selected data flashes.
3
Use the
and
keys to scroll to the desired value.
4
Confirm by pressing the OK key
.
LCD Screen Backlighting
Description
The screen Backlighting output is used to control the backlighting of the LCD display by the program.
In OFF and ON modes, when the user presses any of the key on the front panel the LCD screen turns
on for 30 seconds.
Access
This
function is accessible from the LD function bar.
Used as a Coil
Used as a coil, it lights up the LCD when the contacts to which it is connected are conducting.
Symbol of the coil of the LCD screen Backlighting
function:
The screen is lit if this coil is active.
Message
Description
The Message function block, when activated, allows the following:
To send alarm messages to mobile telephones, toward the Millenium 3 Alarm alarm operations tool
or toward Email addresses via the M3MOD communication interface,
To provide remote access to a DISCR and/or a digital variable, to read or modify them.
There are 28 Message function blocks numbered from E1 to E9, then from EA to EV.
Note: The Message function is only available on controllers with a clock and when a M3MOD
communication interface is added to them.
For more information on the configuration of the communication interface, see page Configuration of
the M3MOD Communication Via Modem Interface.
Access
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
This
Page 70 sur 249
function is accessible from the LD function bar.
Use of the Coil
Enable function
Symbol of the Command Input coil of a Message function
block:
This coil sends the configured alarm message in the associated Message function block, when it is
activated.
Depending on the configuration of the Message function block, the coil may be activated during
detection on its input, by a transition:
From the OFF state to the ON state (by default),
From the ON state to the OFF state.
For more information, see Configuration from the Software Workshop hereafter.
Use as a Contact
The contact associated with the Message function block indicates whether the function block is
activated.
It may be used as many times as necessary as many times as necessary in the program. It may be
used according to 2 modes: normally open or normally closed, described below.
Normally open mode:
Symbol of the normally open contact associated with a Message function
block:
The contact is conducting when the function block is activated.
Normally closed mode:
Symbol of the normally closed contact associated with a Message function
block:
The contact is conducting as long as the function block is not activated.
Example: Lighting an LED connected to the output of the Message function block No.1
When function block no. 1 is activated, the associated alarm message is sent and the LED lights up,
otherwise it is off.
Modification of the Mode of a Coil or a Contact
In the programming software, to modify the mode of a coil or a contact, simply position the cursor on
the element then:
With the mouse: Right-click to display a list of possible modes (left-click to confirm),
With the space bar: Scroll through all possible statuses.
Configuration from the Software Workshop
Double click on the function block to make the parameters window appear. Use the two Type and
Parameters tabs of this window to configure the block.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 71 sur 249
In the Type tab:
Select the type of the alarm message:
Alarm: Is used to send an alarm message on activation of the function block. The variables
associated with the block may be displayed in the message.
Modification of variables: Is used to provide access to a DISCR and/or a digital variable. Each of
these two variables may be declared as readable and modifiable.
Alarm with variable modification: Used to send an alarm message on activation of the function
block. The values of variables linked to the block may be displayed in the message and is used to
provide access to a DISRC variable and/or digital variable, each of these 2 variables may be
declared as readable and modifiable.
In the Parameters tab:
Specify the alarm message recipients of this block. These recipients are chosen from the Directory of
Program Recipients.
To do this, proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Click on the button
message.
of the Message Recipient zone to add a recipient or modify the list of recipients of this
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 72 sur 249
Result: The following window
appears:
These recipients are chosen from the Directory of Program Recipients.
2
For each new recipient to be added, select it in the directory of the program and click on the Send to -> button.
3
Organize the recipients in the order of priority by using the + and - buttons.
4
Double click on a recipient of the function to specify the types of commands that it will be authorized to execute:
Choose No to prevent a recipient from accessing variables connected to the Message function block,
Choose Read to enable a recipient to execute read commands for variables connected to the Message
function block,
Choose Modify to allow recipients to execute read and modify variables connected to the Message function
block: this choice is only available for recipients declared authorized to modify variables in the directory.
Note: For more information on sending commands, see the on-line help of the Millenium 3 Alarm alarm
operations tool and the user help document of the operations folder.
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
5
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
Choose the associated variables for the Message function block. The values of the linked variables
may be (according to the configuration of the Message function block) displayed in the alarm
messages sent, and/or read and modified using the commands sent from a mobile telephone or from
the alarms operations tool. It is possible to link 1 DISCR and/or digital variable with each Message
function block.
To do this, proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Click on the button
function block.
in the second zone in the window to select the variables accessible for this Message
Result: The Values to Send window appears.
2
In the Values to Send:
Choose, in the list of DISRC variables in the program, the one that will be associated with this Message
function block.
Choose, in the list of digital variables in the program, the one that will be associated with this Message
function block.
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
3
Double click on the line of the DISCR variable, to access the Configure Connection window. This window is
used to:
Modify the Alias of the variable,
Possibly make the variable readable and modifiable.
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
4
Double click on the line of the digital variable, to access the Configure Connection window. This window is
used to:
Modify the Alias of the variable,
Possibly make the variable readable and modifiable,
Define a range of values possible for the variable, if a modify command is sent, the new value ought to be
found in this page, otherwise the command will not be processed,
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
Define the object and body of alarm message (these 2 fields are not available if the type chosen is
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 73 sur 249
Modify variables).
It is possible to include the value of one or both variables associated with the function block in the body
of the message. To do so:
Select the variable in the list,
Drag and drop the variable into the zone of the message body.
Note: For GSM modems, to send an Email via SMS, the syntax to use in the subject and message
body is specific to each telephone operator. Contact the telephone operator of the SIM card of the
modem and refer to the section Sending an Email via SMS for more information.
Define the Condition for generating message (this field is not available if the type chosen is Modify
variables).
Choose:
OFF to ON Transition, so that the message will be sent when the coil input becomes active,
ON to OFF Transition, so that the message will be sent when the coil input becomes inactive,
Order of Priority
When sending an alarm message, the M3MOD communication interface contacts the message
recipients one after another. The Choose Recipients window is used to define the order in which the
message recipients are contacted.
Depending on whether the Recognition option is activated or not, two types of recipients may be
defined:
Recipient without recognition: The alarm message is systematically sent, then the communication
interface processes the next recipient,
Recipient with recognition (for mobile-type recipients only): The communication interface sends
the alarm message and waits for acknowledgement of the recipient via its mobile telephone:
If the recipient with recognition acknowledges the message, the communication interface
continues the send sequence only to recipients without recognition,
If the recipient with recognition does not acknowledge the message in the given time
(Recognition delay), the communication interface processes the next recipient.
For more information on activating the Recognition option, see Creating a Recipient.
Configuration from the Front Panel
The Message function block cannot be configured from the front panel of the controller. This function
must be configured from the programming software.
Initialization
Status of contacts on program initialization:
The normally open mode (direct state) is inactive,
The normally closed mode (inverse state) is active.
Programming from the Software Workshop
At a Glance
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the different functions that may be accessed from the software workshop in LD
mode.
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 74 sur 249
Creating an LD Application
Debugging an LD Application in the Programming Software
Creating an LD Application
Overview
Aim of this Section
This section describes the different functions linked to programming in the programming workshop in
LD mode.
What's in this Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Entering a Contact or a Coil
Entering a Link
Automation Function Parameters
Inserting/Deleting a Program Line
Copying Parts of a Program
Program Consistency Check
Entering a Contact or a Coil
Description
This section describes the procedures for performing the following operations:
Entering an element
Modifying an element
Deleting an element
This is valid for either type of element: contact or coil, whether its parameters can be set or not.
Entering an Element
When entering an element, the following rules must be observed:
Contact: in any column except the last two
Coil: in the second-last column (the last column is reserved for comments)
Entry procedure:
Steps
Description
1
Select the type of element required in the toolbar:
Illustration
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 75 sur 249
The list of available elements is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
When the mouse is moved over one of the elements, the dialog box displays the list of available
variables:
The element number
The element label
The associated comment
2
Select the required element in the dialog box by placing the mouse pointer over it.
3
If necessary, enter a comment by clicking in the comment zone.
4
Left-click with the mouse.
5
Release the mouse button over the selected cell.
Deleting an Element
To delete an element, select the element then press one of the keys on the keyboard:
Del
Back space
Right-click/Clear
Control X
Entering a Link
Description
This section describes the procedures for performing the following operations:
Entering links between elements
Deleting links between elements
Replacing a link with a contact
Entering a Link
Links are entered exclusively in cells framed by dotted lines.
Entry procedure:
Steps
Description
1
Select the segment to transform, by placing the mouse pointer over it.
2
Left-click with the mouse: the validated segment turns red.
Illustration
3
Release the mouse button: The segment is created.
4
Connect the elements on the wiring sheet by clicking on the dotted lines that
separate them.
Deleting a Link
To delete the links between elements, simply click again on the link.
Replacing a Link with a Contact
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 76 sur 249
To replace a link with a contact, simply:
Follow the procedure for entering an element.
Place the contact over the segment to modify.
Note: This operation is only possible in cells reserved for contacts.
Automation Function Parameters
Description
When entering a ladder diagram, the parameters of the configurable automation functions must be
completed.
Discrete outputs
Auxiliary memories
Clocks
Timers
Counters
High-speed counter
Counter comparators
Texts
Once the automation function has been entered on the wiring sheet, double-click on it and the
corresponding parameter setting window opens.
This window has two tabs:
Parameters: these are the specific parameters associated with the variable
Comments: associated comments
Direct access
Once the automation function has been entered on the wiring sheet, double-click on it and the
corresponding parameter setting window opens.
Access via the Settings View
The Settings view enables you to list all automation functions with parameters used in the application.
This view is accessible in the edit window by clicking on the
button.
The general interface allows the user to view all the information:
No: Function number
Function: Timer, Counter, etc.
Label: Identification of the function block on the wiring sheet
Parameters: The target value for a counter, etc.
Save on power failure: Indicates whether the Save on power failure option has been selected
Modification authorized: Indicates whether or not parameter modification is possible from the
controller front panel
Comment : Comments associated with the function
Position: Position on the wiring sheet
Illustration:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 77 sur 249
To adjust the various parameters, double-click on the desired line.
Parameters in ON Mode
In the programming workshop, in ON mode (SIMULATION, MONITORING, Remote control of the front
panel), it is possible to modify the parameters in real-timeif they are in Modification authorized mode
via:
The PARAMETERS menu on the front panel
The edit sheet, by right-clicking on the function block
The Function blocks command box
The supervision window
List of authorized actions
Automation functions
Authorized modification
Counter
Preset value
Timer
The timing duration(s)
Clock
The range, Day of the Week (D/W), and ON/OFF parameters
Inserting/Deleting a Program Line
Inserting Lines
Select the line to move down or one of its cells, and use one of the following methods:
With the keyboard: Press the Insert key
With the mouse: Right-click/Insert a line on the number of the line to move down
With the menus: Click on Edit → Insert a line
Deleting Lines
To delete a line (or a cell), select the line (or a cell), then use one of the following methods:
With the keyboard: Press the Delete, or Backspace key, or Ctrl + X
With the mouse: Right click/Delete line, on the number of the line to delete
With the menus: Click on Edit → Delete line
Copying Parts of a Program
Description
It is possible to copy entire parts of the program:
Steps
Description
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 78 sur 249
1
Select the elements to copy.
2
Right-click and select Copy to copy the elements to the clipboard (CTRL+ C).
3
Place the cursor over the recipient zone.
4
Right-click and select Paste to paste the elements contained in the clipboard (CTRL+ V).
Note: It is also possible to use the Cut, Copy and Paste commands from the Edit menu.
Program Consistency Check
Description
When entering the program, the programming workshop constantly checks the consistency of the
program, for instance:
incomplete line
RX Reset input not connected
Preset values not defined
The LD network can be simulated, loaded and executed on the controller at any time. Hence it can be
built and debugged one step at a time.
However when wiring anomalies are detected (cable without termination, function Reset not connected,
etc.) an eye symbol goes from blue to red in the upper panel of the edit window.
Illustration
When the software detects a possible problem, the Consistency check panel turns red and you can
display a dialog box by clicking on the
button.
The program’s consistency window provides the following information:
Error number
Location of the error: line and column
Description of the error
By double-clicking on the error in the window, the position of the problem is highlighted on the wiring
sheet.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 79 sur 249
These warnings are always intended to draw the user’s attention to unusual wiring instances, which
may nevertheless be perfectly justified in certain applications.
As a general rule, these warnings correspond to incomplete wiring, to certain inputs not being hardwired (e.g. a function Reset), to parameters left at their default value or to certain odd Clock
configurations (where the output stays ON permanently).
Note: Even if the panel is red, the program can still be simulated or executed. This allows debugging
to continue one step at a time.
An coil that has not been hard-wired is passive.
Debugging an LD Application in the Programming Software
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
This section describes the different functions linked to debugging the application in the programming
software in LD mode.
What's in this Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Simulating an Application
Application Monitoring
Simulating an Application
Description
The simulation mode is used to execute the program directly in the software workshop (locally), as part
of the application debugging procedure.
Illustration:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 80 sur 249
In ON mode, the active contacts are displayed in red in the Program view.
Contacts and coils may be displayed in ORANGE if they are ACTIVE but not supplied with power.
When switching from ON to OFF the current values of the automation functions are reset to zero. Only
permanently forced contacts continue to be displayed (highlighted in red).
In OFF mode, permanent or momentary forcings can be positioned in preparation for ON mode.
In ON mode, the following elements are simulated:
Wiring sheet: Dynamic display (red) of the different active elements of the program
Input commands
Auxiliary relay commands
Output commands
A/B key commands
Automation functions
Clocks
The output contacts of the automation functions in the wiring diagram can be forced to test program
behavior under specific conditions.
(See How to Debug an Application Without Loading it onto the Controller: Simulation)
Simulation of Discrete Inputs
From the Discrete inputs command box
The
icon is used to display or hide the input command box.
Illustration: input I2 conducting
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 81 sur 249
Possible actions:
Permanent forcing: left-click
Momentary forcing: right-click on the desired input
From the wiring sheet
Possible actions:
Permanent forcing: left-click on the desired input
Momentary forcing: right-click
Forcing and maintain: right-click, which then locks the input (highlighted in red) in the desired state:
ON or OFF. No further action can be carried out on this input until a release command has been
performed.
Release: right-click
Release all: right-click
Simulation of Auxiliary Relays
From the Coils command box
The
icon is used to display or hide the coil command box.
Illustration: M2 coil active
Possible actions:
Momentary forcing: left or right-click
From the wiring sheet
Possible actions:
Permanent forcing: left-click on the desired coil
Momentary forcing: right-click
Forcing and maintain: right-click, which then locks the coil (highlighted in red) in the desired state:
ON or OFF. No further action can be carried out on this coil until a release command has been
performed.
Release: right-click
Release all: right-click
Simulation of Discrete Outputs
From the Discrete outputs command box
The
icon is used to display or hide the output command box.
If an output Q is active in simulation, the corresponding bulb is lit. This bulb remains lit when a power
failure is simulated.
Illustration: Q2 output active
Possible actions:
Permanent forcing: left or right-click
From the wiring sheet
Possible actions:
Permanent forcing: left-click on the desired output
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 82 sur 249
Momentary forcing: right-click
Forcing and maintain: right-click, which then locks the output (highlighted in red) in the desired state:
ON or OFF. No further action can be carried out on this output until a release command has been
performed.
Release: right-click
Release all: right-click
Simulation of A/B Keys
From the A/B keys command box
The
icon is used to display or hide the A/B keys command box.
Illustration:
Possible actions:
Momentary forcing: left or right-click
From the wiring sheet
Possible actions:
Permanent forcing: left-click on the desired key
Momentary forcing: right-click
Forcing and maintain: right-click, which then locks the key (highlighted in red) in the desired state:
ON or OFF. No further action can be carried out on this key until a release command has been
performed.
Release: right-click
Release all: right-click
How to Modify Function Parameters
During simulation, it is possible to view and then modify the parameters of a function by proceeding as
follows:
Step
Action
1
Click on the
button.
Result: The function summary table is displayed:
Illustration:
2
Double-click on the function line.
Result: The function parameter window opens.
3
Modify one or more function parameters.
4
Click on OK
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 83 sur 249
Clock Simulation
See Ò
Application Monitoring
Description
The monitoring function is used to execute the program on the controller (online mode) and to display
its progress in the software workshop (using a serial link).
The state of the different elements of the application: inputs/outputs and parameters, are updated on
each program cycle.
Illustration
In ON mode, the active contacts are displayed in red.
Contacts and coils may be displayed in ORANGE if they are ACTIVE but not powered.
When switching from ON to OFF the current values of the automation functions are reset to zero.
It is possible to force certain states from the software workshop and to display all the program’s internal
states (maximum of 10 function block outputs simultaneously).
Note: It is necessary to have the same application on the PC and the controller.
(See How to Monitor and Modify an Application Running on the Controller from the Programming
Workshop: Monitoring)
Access to Monitoring Mode
Monitoring is accessed by the menu: Mode → Monitoring or by using the M icon.
The following scenarios may arise:
An application is open in the software: The version present on the controller is compared with that of
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 84 sur 249
the software workshop:
If the software workshop application is the same as the one present on the controller, monitoring
mode is started.
If the software workshop application is different from the one present on the controller, the
versions must be synchronized by transferring the PC program to the controller or the controller
program to the PC.
No application is open in the software: in this case, the software workshop offers to send the
application currently being executed on the controller back to the PC.
Once the transfer is complete, the supervision screen is displayed.
How to Modify the Parameters of a Function
During monitoring, it is possible to modify the parameters of a function in the Edit window.
Step
Action
1
Double-click on the symbol representing the function. (This operation can be performed in the edit window,
in the function summary table or in the supervision window.)
Result: The function parameter window opens.
2
Modify one or more function parameters.
3
Click on OK
How to perform momentary forcing
In monitoring mode it is possible to momentarily force a contact, an input, an output, an A or B key or
an auxiliary relay using the following procedure:
Method
Action(s)
Using the command box
Display the corresponding command box by clicking one of the following buttons:
for inputs
for auxiliary relays
for outputs
for A/B keys
Right-click or left-click on the button corresponding to the input, output, key or auxiliary
relay to be forced.
Using the wiring sheet
Left-click on the contact corresponding to the input, output, key or auxiliary relay to be forced.
How to perform permanent forcing
In Monitoring mode it is possible to force a contact permanently from the wiring sheet by using the
following procedure:
Step
Action
1
Right-click on the contact.
2
In the pop-up menu choose Force and maintain.
3
Choose the state into which the link should be forced.
Result: The link remains in the chosen state until releasing.
How to Release Forcing
The forced links(s) and forced inputs can be released in the following manner.
To release...
one contact ...
proceed as follows:
Click on the contact with the right mouse button.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 85 sur 249
Click on Release.
all contacts ...
Click on the wiring sheet with the right mouse button.
Click on Release all.
Sample LD Application
At a Glance
Subject of this Chapter
In this chapter we will use the example of an underground car park control. From given specifications,
we will develop the application to program in the controller.
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Specifications
Specification Analysis
Implementing the Solution
Specifications
Objective
We wish to complete and centralize the control of the underground car park of an administrative
building.
Automatic Gate
The entrance and the exit of the car park are controlled by an ordinary automatic gate.
The gate has the usual basic features such as:
Gate timing (opening and closing) by passing vehicles,
Ticket payment management,
Safety telephones,
External control for locking in closed position, etc.
Counting Vehicles
In addition, we would like to keep track of vehicles parked in the facility.
We would thus be able to control a lighted panel that informs drivers when all parking spaces are
occupied and prevents access by locking the gate in the closed position. Drivers would then know to
look for a parking space elsewhere.
It must also be possible to override this function when necessary to allow access for emergency
services (fire department, emergency medical service, etc.).
Open Time
We would also like to prevent access to the facility when the building is closed.
Security personnel should be allowed to prevent the gate from locking in non-ordinary circumstances.
The hours of opening are the following: From Monday to Friday from 8:30 am to 5:30 pm, Saturday
from 9:30 am to 12:00 noon and closed all day Sunday.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 86 sur 249
Lighting
There is also a requirement to control lighting, triggered by a vehicle arriving and via pushbutton
switches placed near all of the pedestrian access point.
To save energy, lights will turn off after 10 minutes. This is the length of time generally observed for
someone to park and exit their vehicle and take the elevator, or return to their vehicle and exit the car
park.
Specification Analysis
Description
Analysis of the specifications includes listing inputs, buttons, outputs and function blocks necessary to
complete the application.
Inputs
Below is the list of inputs that the application will use:
Label
Name
Input I1
Vehicle entry detection.
Input I2
Vehicle exit detection.
Inputs I3
Pushbuttons at pedestrian access points. They are used to light the facility.
(No access via the vehicle entrance is authorized for pedestrians).
Button
Below is the list of buttons that the application will use:
Label
Name
A key
Resumes automatic entry control.
Function key B
Manually releases the entrance barrier.
Outputs
Below is the list of outputs that the application will use:
Label
Name
Output O1
Indicates when the car park facility is full.
Output O2
Locks the entry barrier (inhibits entry barrier opening) when the car park is
full or outside of opening hours.
Output O3
Manually releases the entrance barrier.
Special Function Blocks
Below is the list of special function blocks that the application will use:
Label
Name
Counter C1
Counts the number of vehicles in the car park (93 maximum).
Clock function block H1
Manages car park access hours.
Timer function block T1
Lighting timer (10 minutes).
Note: To complete this solution, we must use a controller with at least 3 discrete inputs and 3
discrete outputs.
Implementing the Solution
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 87 sur 249
Description
Presented here are the control diagrams to program, as well as the parameters to use for the function
blocks.
Implementing the Ladder Diagram
Below is the control diagram to program:
Number
Element
1
Inputs upcount, outputs downcount.
2
Starting the lighting timer.
3
Managing manual release.
4
Outputs command: Indication of full car park, entrance jam, car park lighting.
When up counting and downcounting, the counter will lock when the maximum capacity reached.
Note: For a given counter, the CC and DC coils should only appear once in a ladder diagram.
In addition, the Q2 output is activated when the car park entrance is not allowed.
Configuring the Function Blocks
The table below provides details on the parameters to use for each of the function blocks:
Function block
Comment
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
C1 counter
Page 88 sur 249
The preset value is 93 (the maximum number of vehicles allowed in this car park).
Where necessary, this value may be changed during operation.
H1 Clock
Open hours:
Monday to Friday from 8:30 am to 5:30 pm,
Saturdays from 9:30 am to 12:00 noon.
Closed all day Sundays.
Two ranges are used.
T1 timer
Car park lighting timer: 10 minutes.
FBD Language
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
This section describes the use of FBD (Functional Block Diagram) programming language for the
controller.
What's in this Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Overview of FBD language
FBD Language Elements
FBD Programming
Example of an FBD Application
Overview of FBD language
At a Glance
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter provides a general description of FBD language.
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
FBD Program Edit Window
Function Bar
FBD Program Edit Window
Overview
FBD mode allows graphic programming based on the use of predefined function blocks.
In FBD programming, there are two types of window and two displays:
The edit window
Program view
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 89 sur 249
Settings view
The supervision window
Edit Window in Program View
The FBD programs are created in the edit window in Program view. This can be accessed by using
the
buttons on the controller bar and the
button on the standard toolbar.
The edit window is made up of three zones:
The wiring sheet, where the functions that make up the program are inserted.
The Inputs zone on the left of the wiring sheet where the inputs are positioned.
The Outputs zone on the right of the wiring sheet where the outputs are positioned.
The I/O are specific to the type of controller and extension chosen by the user.
The program in the edit window corresponds to the program that is:
compiled
transferred to the controller
compared to the contents of the controller
used in simulation mode
used in supervision mode
The figure below shows an example of an edit window in FBD language:
The table below lists the different elements in the edit window:
Number
Description
1
Function block input zone.
2
Connection between two function blocks.
3
Function bar.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
4
Function block.
5
Wiring sheet.
6
Function block number.
7
Output function block zone.
Page 90 sur 249
Edit Window in Settings View
The Settings view can be accessed in Edit mode using the
functions with parameters used in the application.
button. It is used to list all automation
The general interface allows the user to view all the information:
Block: function block diagram
Function: Timer, Counter, etc.
Block num: function block ID
Parameters: the target value for a counter, etc. ,
Save on power failure: indicates whether the Save on power failure option has been selected
Modification authorized: indicates whether or not parameter modification is possible from the
controller front panel
Comment : comments associated with the function.
To adjust the various parameters, double-click on the desired line.
Supervision Window
The Supervision window can also be accessed from the following modes:
Simulation : the Mode/Simulation menu or using the simulation button
on the controller bar
Monitoring: the Mode/Monitoring menu or using the monitoring button on the controller bar
It contains the functions, without their connections, that the programmer has extracted (using
Drag/Drop or Copy/Paste) from the edit window.
The window can also contain drawings, text and images.
In simulation and monitoring mode, the parameters and outputs of the functions present are updated.
Function Bar
At a Glance
To create an FBD program, the different functions to be inserted in the wiring sheet are available in a
function bar. Each of the tabs in the function bar groups a function type.
When the mouse is moved over one of the tabs, the dialog box displays the list of available variables.
Inputs Function Bar
The following figure shows the inputs function bar:
Standard Functions Function Bar
The following figure shows the standard functions function bar:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 91 sur 249
SFC Functions Function Bar
The following figure shows the SFC function bar:
Logic Functions Function Bar
The following figure shows the logic function bar:
Outputs Function Bar
The following figure shows the outputs function bar:
FBD Language Elements
At a Glance
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the different elements of the FBD language.
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
Different Input Blocks
Different Output Blocks
Modbus Inputs/Outputs
Ethernet Inputs and Outputs
Logic Functions
Standard Functions
SFC Functions
Different Input Blocks
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 92 sur 249
This section describes the different input blocks available using FBD language.
What's in this Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Discrete-Type Inputs
Filtered Discrete-Type Input
Analog Input
Filtered Analog Input
Integer Type Input
Special Inputs in FBD Language
Extension 10-Bit Integer Input
Discrete-Type Inputs
At a Glance
The Discrete-type input is available for all controller types. Discrete inputs can be arranged over all the
controller inputs.
Access
The Discrete input function
is accessible in the IN function bar.
Type of Discrete Inputs
The type of Discrete input can be selected from the Parameters window. This is then displayed in the
edit and supervision windows.
Type
Display in the Inactive state
Display in the Active state
Discrete input
Contact
Limit switch
Proximity sensor
Presence sensor
Illuminated pushbutton
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 93 sur 249
Selector switch
Pushbutton
Normally open relay
Custom Image
It is also possible to import a custom image. The size of this image should be the smallest possible
(several Kb).
Simulation and Monitoring Modes
In Simulation or Monitoring modes, it is possible to force Discrete inputs. In this case, the input symbol
is displayed as shown in the above table.
Filtered Discrete-Type Input
At a Glance
Behind the Discrete input, a filter is added to reduce or even eliminate disturbances.
A Discrete input is filtered using a constant level detection algorithm (1 or 0) on the "sensor" signal,
measured over a certain time frame. If the signal is stable throughout the entire detection period, the
output of the symbol from the filtered Discrete input takes the value of the measured signal. Otherwise
it remains unchanged.
The filtered Discrete inputs can be arranged at any controller input.
Access
The filtered Discrete input function
is accessible from the IN window.
Parameter
The value of the parameter (between 1 and 255) entered in the Parameters window may be used to
define the minimum time during which the signal must be stable. This value is a multiple of the duration
of the basic cycle of the controller.
Simulation and Monitoring Modes
In Simulation or Monitoring modes, it is possible to force filtered Discrete inputs. In this case, the input
symbol is displayed as follows
.
Analog Input
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 94 sur 249
Overview
The Analog input is available on all types of controller supplied with a DC voltage.
The Analog input voltage is converted into a numerical integer value by a 10-bit analog/digital
converter. The integer value of the output is between 0 and 1023.
Analog inputs can only be arranged on the inputs between IB and IG.
Access
The Analog input function
is accessible from the IN window.
Parameter
By default, this voltage varies between 0 and 10V DC.
The type of electrical connection at the input can be configured in the Parameters window:
0 - 10 V
Potentiometer, selected if the input is connected to a potentiometric device with a power supply
between 0 Volts and the controller supply voltage
Types of Analog Input
The type of Analog input can be selected from the Parameters window. This is then displayed in the
edit and supervision windows.
Type
Display in edit mode
Input (by default)
Input
Temperature
Potentiometer
Custom Image
It is also possible to import a custom image. The size of this image should be the smallest possible (a
few Kb).
Simulation and Monitoring Modes
In Simulation or Monitoring modes, you can force (between 0 and 1023) the output of the analog inputs.
Filtered Analog Input
At a Glance
Behind the analog input, a low pass filter is added. This function is available on all the types of
controllers supplied with a DC voltage.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 95 sur 249
The Analog input voltage is converted into a digital integer value by a 10-bit analog/digital converter.
The whole output value is between 0 and 1023.
The Analog inputs can only be placed on the inputs numbered from IB to IG.
Low Pass Filter
A low pass filter restores the entire input signal (frequency, amplitude and phase-shift), whose
frequency is considerable lower, to a typical filter frequency, called a cut-off frequency. When the
frequency of the input signal nears the cut-off frequency, the output signal, of the same frequency,
becomes increasingly lower and phase-shifted. When the frequency of the input signal is equal to the
cut-off frequency, the output signal is lowered by around 30%, and phase-shifted by 45º. For a
frequency above and rising from the cut-off frequency, the reduction becomes greater (until it reaches
total elimination) and the phase-shifting approaches 90º.
Access
The filtered Analog input function
is accessible from the IN window.
Parameters
The Parameters window is used to define:
The input voltage. By default, this voltage varies between 0 and 10Vdc.
The potentiometer is chosen if the input is connected to a potentiometer device powered between 0
volts and the voltage of the controller power supply.
The cut-off frequency of the low pass filter (between 0.06 and 88.25 Hz).
CAUTION
The potentiometer option is selected if the input is connected to a potentiometric
device supplied between 0 Volts and the tester supply voltage.
Whenever a modification is made to the basic cycle time, you must check or modify the
cut-off frequency
Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.
Integer Type Input
At a Glance
This function is used to enter a 16-bit (-32768, +32767) integer from the outputs of certain connected
extensions.
Integer-type inputs can be positioned on the inputs (J9 to JB) of the extension controllers.
Access
The integer input function
is accessible from the IN window.
Special Inputs in FBD Language
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 96 sur 249
At a Glance
In FBD, various special inputs are available:
Button,
Discrete constants,
Numerical constants,
Summer time,
Blinking for 1 second.
All these inputs can be accessed from the IN window.
These inputs cannot be inserted in the input plots of the diagram sheet.
Button-type Inputs
Button-type inputs correspond to the keys available on the
front panel of the controller. These inputs can be inserted in an FBD diagram and, in Simulation and
Monitoring mode, can simulate contacts.
Discrete Constant-Type Inputs
There are two types of Discrete constants: the 1 constant
two constants can be used to set the function inputs to 1 or 0.
and the 0 constant
. These
In Simulation or Monitoring modes, you can force these inputs in the reverse order. The symbol then
appears in red.
Numerical Constant-Type Inputs
The numerical constant NUM
is an integer with a value between -32768 and +32767.
This constant can be used to set values to the functions’ non-connected inputs:
GAIN,
COMP IN ZONE,
TRIGGER.
The value of the constant can be set in the Parameters window.
In Simulation or Monitoring modes, it is possible to modify the constant.
Summer Time Input
The summer time input function is active
winter time
throughout summer time, and inactive throughout
.
Note: To confirm this function:
display the Program configuration window: menu:Edit → Program configuration,
select the Date format tab,
check the Activate the summer/winter time change box,
define the dates when the time change takes place:
Either using one of the preset geographic zones,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 97 sur 249
Or by manually configuring the date (month/Sunday).
Blinking Input
The blinking input function is active every second. Its active symbol is
and its inactive symbol is
.
Extension 10-Bit Integer Input
Overview
The extension10-bit integer inputs are available on controllers that are compatible with the
XAO4 24VDC analog I/O extension.
10-bit integer inputs can only be arranged on IPXA and IQXA input squares of the XAO4 24VDC analog
I/O extension.
The analog input voltage is converted into a numerical integer value by a 10-bit analog/digital converter.
The converter output integer value is between 0 and 1023.
Access
The extension 10-bit integer input function
is accessible from the IN window.
Parameters
10-bit integer inputs are configured from the Analog extension tab of the Program Configuration
window, see XAO4 24VDC Analog I/O Extension.
Simulation and Monitoring Modes
In Simulation or Monitoring modes, you can force (between 0 and 1023) the output of the analog inputs.
Different Output Blocks
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
This section describes the different output blocks available using FBD language.
What's in this Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Discrete-Type Outputs
LCD Screen Backlighting Output
Integer Type Output
PWM-Type Output
Extension 10-Bit Analog Output
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 98 sur 249
Discrete-Type Outputs
At a Glance
The controllers feature two types of Discrete outputs:
Solid state outputs for certain controllers supplied with a DC voltage,
Relay outputs for controllers supplied with an AC or DC voltage.
Access
The Discrete output function
is accessible from the OUT window.
Types of Discrete Outputs
The type of Discrete output can be selected from the Parameters window. This is then displayed in the
edit and supervision windows. The selection is made using the output’s inactive-state symbol.
Type
Display in the Inactive state
Display in the Active state
Discrete Output
Normally open relay
Lamp
Solid state relay
Valve
Actuator
Motor
Resistance
Audible signal
Green indicator light
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 99 sur 249
Red indicator light
Orange indicator light
Indicator light
Heating
Fan
Custom Image
It is also possible to import a custom image. The size of this image should be the smallest possible
(several Kb).
Simulation and Monitoring Modes
In Simulation or Monitoring modes, outputs are displayed in the active or inactive state with their
corresponding symbols (shown in the table above).
LCD Screen Backlighting Output
At a Glance
The LCD screen BACK LIGHT output enables the program to control the backlighting of the LCD
display of the controller.
As long as the connected input is active, the backlighting is on.
This function cannot be arranged on the controller outputs.
Access
The LCD Screen Backlighting Output function
is accessible from the OUT window.
Simulation and Monitoring Modes
The following table lists the symbols of the LCD Screen Backlighting function in Simulation or
Monitoring modes.
Input State
Inactive
Symbol in Simulation and Monitoring mode
Description
The LCD screen is off.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Active
Page 100 sur 249
The LCD screen is back-lit.
Integer Type Output
At a Glance
This function is used to create a 16-bit (-32768, +32767) integer output towards the integer-type inputs
of certain extensions connected to the controller.
Integer-type outputs can be positioned on the outputs (O9 to OB) of the extension controllers.
Note: If the function input is not connected, the output is 0.
Access
The integer output function
is accessible from the OUT window.
PWM-Type Output
Overview
Depending on the model, controllers with solid state outputs have one or more discrete outputs that can
be controlled using PWM (pulse width modulation).
The mean value of the PWM output voltage is then proportional to the 8-bit analog setpoint. This
enables a value between 0 and 100% of its maximum value to be controlled using a discrete output. 0%
corresponds to setpoint 0 and 100% corresponds to setpoint 255.
Access
The PWM output function
can be accessed from the OUT function bar.
Frequencies
The basic frequency of all the PWM-type controller outputs can be set from the Configuration tab of
the Program Configuration window.
The Frequency of all controller PWMs parameter enables the basic frequency for PWM-type outputs
to be selected from the following values:
1806 Hz
452 Hz
226 Hz
113 Hz
56 Hz
14 Hz
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 101 sur 249
Note: This parameter does not affect the analog extension outputs.
Usable Outputs
The physical outputs of the controller in PWM mode are those with high indices:
O4 for controllers reference CD12 S and XD10 S
O4 to O7 for controllers reference CD20 S
O4 to O7 for controllers reference XD26 S
Extension 10-Bit Analog Output
Overview
10-bit analog outputs are available on controllers that are compatible with XAO4 24VDC analog I/O
extensions.
10-bit analog outputs can only be arranged on OF XA and OG XA output blocks of the XAO4 24VDC
analog I/O extensions.
A 10-bit analog/digital converter converts the numerical integer value into an output voltage that may be
either:
PWM (pulse width modulation): In this case, the output voltage is periodic and takes the values 0 V
and 10 V so that its average value is proportional to the analog setpoint. This enables a value
between 0 and 100% of its maximum value to be controlled using a discrete output.
Analog: The analog output voltage varies between 0 and 10 V (1023 gives 10 V).
Access
The 10-bit integer output function
is accessible from the OUT window.
Parameters
The 10-bit integer outputs are configured from the Analog extension tab of the Program
Configuration window accessible by clicking on the XAO4 24VDC button, see XAO4 24VDC Analog
I/O Extension.
Modbus Inputs/Outputs
Description
A Modbus XN03 extension can be added to a basic controller of the XD10..., XD10S..., XD26... or
XD26S... type.
In FBD mode, the 4 (16-bit) input words (from J1XT1 to J4XT1) and the 4 output words (from O1XT1 to
O4XT1) can be accessed by the application.
Note: The Modbus extension only operates in Modbus slave mode.
Parameters
Parameters are set in the workshop, using the MODBUS Extension tab of the Program configuration
window. This tab can be accessed from the menu: File → Properties. The MODBUS extension tab
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
can be accessed directly via the
Page 102 sur 249
icon on the cartridge.
When changing to ON mode, the controller initializes the Modbus extension.
The extension has 4 parameters:
Number of wires and frame format on the Modbus network
Data transmission speed in bauds
Protocol parity
Slave Modbus extension network address
Modbus Inputs
The Modbus XN03 extension has 4 (16-bit) inputs:
J1XT1 (Hex address 0x0010)
J2XT1 (0x0011)
J3XT1(0x0012)
J4XT1(0x0013)
This data is received from the master.
Modbus Outputs
The Modbus XN03 extension has 4 (16-bit) outputs:
O1XT1 (Hex address 0x0014)
O2XT1 (0x0015)
O3XT1(0x0016)
O4XT1(0x0017)
This data is sent to the master.
Ethernet Inputs and Outputs
Description
It is possible to add an XN05 24VDC Ethernet extension to a XD10 24VDC, XD10S 24VDC,
XD26 24VDC or XD26S 24VDC type controller.
In FBD mode, if the extension is present, then the application can use the eight blocks J1ETH to J8ETH
as inputs and the eight blocks O1ETH to O8ETH as outputs. Each block represents a 16-bit Modbus
word.
The Ethernet extension exchanges Modbus messages as a server, using the set of TCP/IP protocols
and Ethernet technology (see Communication Via Ethernet Extension).
Parameters
Parameters are set in the workshop using the XN05 24VDC button of the cartridge.
See How to Set the Communication Parameters
Ethernet Inputs
The Ethernet extension has eight 16-bit inputs:
J1ETH (address 12)
J2ETH (13)
J3ETH (14)
J4ETH (15)
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 103 sur 249
J5ETH (16)
J6ETH (17)
J7ETH (18)
J8ETH (19)
These words can be accessed in read and write modes.
Ethernet Outputs
The Ethernet extension has eight 16-bit outputs:
O1ETH (address 20)
O2ETH (21)
O3ETH (22)
O4ETH (23)
O5ETH (24)
O6ETH (25)
O7ETH (26)
O8ETH (27)
These words can be accessed in read mode only.
Logic Functions
At a Glance
In FBD language, it is possible to use logic functions in the block diagrams. The available functions are:
The NO function,
The AND function,
The OR function,
The NO AND function,
The NO OR function,
The EXCLUSIVE OR function.
Access
These inputs can be accessed from the LOGIC window.
Logical functions
The following table shows the various logic functions:
Function
AND
Symbol
Description
Number Input
of inputs type
If all the inputs are active or not connected, the output is active.
4
Digital
4
Digital
4
Digital
If at least one input is inactive, the output is inactive.
NO AND
If at least one input is inactive, the output is active.
If all the inputs are active or not connected, the output is inactive.
NO OR
If all the inputs are inactive or not connected, the output is active.
If at least one input is active, the output is inactive.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
NO
Page 104 sur 249
If the input is inactive or not connected, the output is active.
1
Digital
4
Digital
2
Digital
If the input is active, the output is inactive.
OR
If at least one input is active, the output is active.
If all the inputs are inactive or not connected, the output is inactive.
EXCLUSIVE OR
If an input is inactive and the other input is active or not connected,
the output is active.
If both inputs are active or inactive or not connected, the output is
inactive.
Standard Functions
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
This section describes the different standard functions available using FBD language.
What's in this Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Boolean Equation
SET and RESET function
PRESET COUNT Up/Down Counter
UP/DOWN COUNT Up/Down Counter
TIMERS
COMP IN ZONE Comparison
PRESET H-METER Preset Hour Counter
Schmitt Trigger
COMPARE Function for Comparing Two Analog Values
GAIN Function
Display on the LCD DISPLAY Screen
TEXT Function
TIME PROG Programmer
Bistable Impulse Relay Function
MUX Multiplexing Function
ADD-SUB Arithmetic Function
MUL-DIV Arithmetic Function
CAM BLOCK Cam Programmer
ARCHIVE Function
Controller STATUS
BIN/DEC Bits to Words Conversion
DEC/BIN Words-to-Bits Conversion
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 105 sur 249
Serial Link Input
Serial Link Output
Min Max Function
Message Function
Boolean Equation
At a Glance
The BOOLEAN function gives the value of the output according to the combination of inputs.
The function has four inputs, and therefore 16 combinations. These combinations can be found in a
truth table; for each of these, the output value can be adjusted. The number of configurable
combinations depends on the number of inputs connected to the function.
Non-connected inputs are set to 0.
The following diagram shows an example of part of the Boolean function truth table:
Access
The
function is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Parameters
Having connected at least one input, you can configure the value of the output in the truth table, in the
Parameters window.
The output values can be 0 for the Inactive state, and 1 for the Active state.
By selecting the Output ON if result is TRUE option, the output takes the value configured in the truth
table.
By selecting the Output OFF if result is TRUE option, the output takes the inverse value of the value
configured in the truth table.
SET and RESET function
At a Glance
The SET RESET function operates as follows:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 106 sur 249
Activation of the SET input activates the output, which remains so even if the SET input is then
deactivated,
Activation of the RESET input deactivates the output,
If both inputs are active, the state of the output depends on the configuration of the function:
The output is active if the SET has priority option is configured,
The output is inactive if the RESET has priority option is configured.
Non-connected inputs are set to the Inactive state.
Access
This
function is accessible from the FBD function bar.
PRESET COUNT Up/Down Counter
Description
The PRESET COUNT up/down counter function is used to up-count from 0 to the preset value, or to
down-count from this value to 0.
Several functions are available:
Up-counting and forcing the counter to 0 on initialization,
Up-counting and forcing the counter to 0 on initialization and when the count value has been
reached,
Down-counting and forcing the counter to the preset value on initialization,
Down-counting and forcing the counter to the preset value on initialization and when 0 has been
reached.
Access
This function
is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The up/down counter uses:
A discrete UP-COUNT input,
A discrete DOWN-COUNT input,
A discrete INITIALIZATION input.
The up/down counter provides:
A discrete OUTPUT,
The preset value (1),
The current counter value (1),
The output timer value (1).
(1) these integer values are displayed in Simulation and Monitoring mode.
Parameters
In the programming workshop
From the Parameters window, you can adjust:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 107 sur 249
The Upcounting to the preset value or Downcounting from the preset value,
The Preset or Setpoint value (1),
The Single cycle for initializing the counter only on initialization,
The Repetitive cycle for initializing the counter on initialization, and when the current count value
reaches 0 or the preset value.
For the Repetitive cycle, the DURATION OF THE PULSE (x 100ms) corresponding to the time for
which the output is Active.
The Save on power break parameter, if selected, enables the current value of the timer to be retrieved
following a power failure.
From the front panel
From the PARAMETER menu, you can adjust:
The Preset or Counting setpoint value,
The DURATION OF PULSE value (for a repetitive cycle).
Illustration
Illustration: parameters of the counter
1 Name of the parameter displayed
2 Value of the parameter displayed
Parameter Modification
To modify the parameters from the front panel of the controller, check the Authorized modification
box of the Parameters window.
Up-Counting Function in Single Cycle Mode
For the next four graphs, the blue curve represents the internal value of the counter, when it increases
there are pulses at the counting input and when it decreases, at the down-counting input.
The following diagram shows the operation of the counter with initialization at 0:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 108 sur 249
Down-Counting Function in Single Cycle Mode
The following diagram shows the operation of the down-counter with initialization at the preset value:
Up-Counting Function in Repetitive Cycle Mode
The following diagram shows the operation of the counter with forcing to 0 of the current value on
initialization, or when the count value has reached the preset value:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 109 sur 249
The output switches to the Inactive state when the predefined pulse duration value has run out. If the
switch condition is Active before the switch to the Inactive state, the output pulse is prolonged by the
DURATION OF THE PULSE (Timing).
Down-Counting Function in Repetitive Cycle Mode
The following diagram shows the operation of the down-counter with forcing to the preset value of the
current value on initialization, or when the count value has reached 0:
The output switches to the Inactive state when the predefined pulse duration value has run out. If the
switch condition is Active before the switch to the Inactive state, the output pulse is prolonged by the
DURATION OF THE PULSE (Timing).
UP/DOWN COUNT Up/Down Counter
Description
The UP/DOWN COUNT function is used to up-count or down-count from a preset value resulting from a
calculation outside the function.
A level 1 on the PRESET FORCING input is used to change the counter with the value available at the
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 110 sur 249
PRESET input.
The PRESET input can be connected to the NUM constant, to an analog input, or to any other kind of
output on a function block which delivers an INTEGER-type value.
A rising edge on the:
UPCOUNTING: increments the counter.
DOWNCOUNTING: decrements the counter.
State of the OUTPUT:
1: when the counting number has been reached, the OUTPUT switches to 1 and remains so for as
long as the counting number is greater than or equal to the PRESET value,
0: if the transitions on the DOWNCOUNT input switch the counting number back to a value less than
the PRESET value.
Activation of the RESET or PRESET FORCING inputs enable the counter to be relaunched.
As long as the RESET input is at 1, the OUTPUT remains at 0. When the RESET input switches to 0,
the up/down count operation is relaunched from zero.
Access
This function
is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The up/down counter uses the following inputs:
UPCOUNTING, Discrete type,
DOWNCOUNT, Discrete type,
RESET, Discrete type,
PRESET FORCING, Discrete type,
PRESET, integer type.
The up/down counter provides the following outputs:
OUTPUT, Discrete type,
CURRENT VALUE, integer type, between -32768 and 32767.
Parameters
The Save on power break parameter, if selected, enables the current value of the timer to be retrieved
following a power failure.
TIMERS
Overview
The TIMERS function block provides access to the following types of timers:
Timer A/C is used to delay or prolong actions over a predetermined time:
Function A: Timer on-delay
Function C: Timer off-delay
Function A-C: Combination of functions A and C
Timer BW is used to create a pulse for the duration of a cycle on the output from an input edge.
Timer Li is used to create flashing (the durations of on and off states can be configured):
Function Li: The flashing cycle starts with an ON state.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 111 sur 249
Function L: The flashing cycle starts with an OFF state.
Timer B/H creates a pulse on the output of the rising edge of the input.
Function B: Regardless of the duration of the command pulse, the output is active for a duration
that has been set.
Function H: The output is inactive at the end of a set time or on the falling edge of the command.
The totaliser creates a pulse on the output when the period during which the input was active
reaches (one or more times) a set value.
Access
This
function block is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Choice of Timer
To place a timer on the wiring sheet and select its type, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Click on the
required place.
icon of the FBD function bar, hold down the mouse button and slide the icon to the
Result: The following window
appears:
2
Select the desired type of timer from the 5 types available in this window.
3
If required, you can check the External setpoint box: in this case the on time(s) or off time(s) will be integertype timer block inputs rather than being internal configurable parameters.
Note: Function unavailable for the timer type BW.
Inputs/Outputs
Timer inputs:
Timer A/C
Timer BW
TIMER Li
-
-
Timer B/H
Totaliser
Command
Reset
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 112 sur 249
On delay setpoint value
-
-
-
-
Off delay setpoint value
-
-
-
-
On setpoint value
-
-
-
Off setpoint value
-
-
-
-
Number/Duration of flashes
-
-
-
-
Total time setpoint value
-
-
-
-
Key:
: Input always available on this timer.
: Input available on this timer only if the External setpoint box was checked when the timer type
was selected.
Timer outputs:
Timer A/C
Timer BW
TIMER Li
Timer B/H
Totaliser
On delay setpoint value
-
-
-
-
On delay current value
-
-
-
-
Off delay setpoint value
-
-
-
-
Off delay current value
-
-
-
-
Output
On setpoint value
-
-
-
On current value
-
-
-
Off setpoint value
-
-
-
-
Off current value
-
-
-
-
Number/Duration of flashes
-
-
-
-
Current value number/duration of
flashing
-
-
-
-
Total time setpoint value
-
-
-
-
Total time current value
-
-
-
-
Key:
: Output always available on this timer.
: Output available on this timer only if the External setpoint box was left unchecked when the
timer type was selected.
Timer A/C Parameters
In the programming workshop
The Parameters window is used to:
Select the time unit of the delays; these delays can be expressed in seconds, tenths of seconds or
number of cycles.
Set the ON delay value for function A, only if the External setpoint box was left unchecked when
the timer type was selected.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 113 sur 249
Set the OFF delay value for function C, only if the External setpoint box was left unchecked
when the timer type was selected.
Possibly activate the Save on power failure parameter. It enables the timer to be restarted at the
point where it stopped after a power failure.
The combination of both the ON and OFF delays can be used to obtain a function A/C.
From the front panel
From the PARAMETERS menu, you can set:
The value of the On delay parameter
The value of the Off delay parameter
Illustration:
1 Name of the parameter displayed
2 Value of the parameter displayed
Timing Diagrams For Timer A/C
Function A:
Function C:
Note: Each pulse on the COMMAND input of the TIMERS timer block resets the current value to 0.
Function A-C:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 114 sur 249
Example with reset:
Timer BW Parameters
In the programming workshop
The Parameters window is used to select the type of edge on the input that will generate the pulse on
the output.
Select:
From OFF to ON to generate a pulse on each rising edge of the input
From ON to OFF to generate a pulse on each falling edge of the input
From OFF to ON and from ON to OFF to generate a pulse on each rising edge and each falling
edge of the input
Timer Li Parameters
The Parameters window is used to:
Select the time unit of the delays, these delays can be expressed in seconds, tenths of seconds or
number of cycles.
Select the type of flashing: select function Li for the flashing to begin with an On state, and select
function L for the flashing to begin with an Off state.
Set the On time value, only if the External setpoint box was left unchecked when the timer type
was selected.
Set the Off time value, only if the External setpoint box was left unchecked when the timer type
was selected.
Select the stop mode of the flashes, select:
Number of flashes in order to stop after a set number of flashes (enter the value of the number
of flashes, if the External setpoint box was left unchecked when the timer type was selected).
Duration of flashes in order to stop after a set time (enter the value of the duration, if the
External setpoint box was left unchecked when the timer type was selected).
Continuous flashing so that the flashes do not stop until the Command input is active.
Possibly activate the Save on power failure parameter. It enables the timer to be restarted at the
point where it stopped after a power failure.
From the front panel
From the PARAMETERS menu, you can set:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 115 sur 249
the value of the On time parameter
the value of the Off time parameter
the value of the counting setpoint parameter corresponding either to the duration of flashing, or to
the number of flashes
Illustration:
1 Name of the parameter displayed
2 Value of the parameter displayed
Timing Diagrams For Timer Li
Continuous flashing mode:
Number of flashes mode:
Duration of flashes mode:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 116 sur 249
Timer B/H Parameters
In the programming workshop
The Parameters window is used to:
Select the time unit of the ON time; this time can be expressed in seconds, tenths of seconds or
number of cycles.
Set the On time value, only if the External setpoint box was left unchecked when the timer type
was selected.
Select the operating mode of the timer, select Function B so that the output remains active
regardless of the duration of the command pulse; select Function H so that the output switches to
the inactive state on the falling edge of the command.
Possibly activate the Save on power failure parameter. It enables the timer to be restarted at the
point where it stopped after a power failure.
From the front panel
From the PARAMETERS menu, you can set:
The value of the On time: pulse duration.
Illustration:
Timing Diagrams For Timer B/H
Function B:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 117 sur 249
Note: Each pulse on the timer COMMAND input resets the current value to 0.
Function H:
Totaliser Parameters
In the programming workshop
The Parameters window is used to:
Select the time unit of the ON time; this time can be expressed in minutes, seconds, tenths of
seconds or number of cycles.
Set the value T of the time to be reached, only if the External setpoint box was left unchecked
when the timer type was selected
Select the totaliser operating mode , select:
At so that the totaliser output switches to the active state when the time spent in the inactive
state by the input reaches the set time
Ht so that the totaliser output switches to the inactive state when the time spent in the inactive
state by the input reaches the set time
T so that the totaliser output switches to the active state when the time spent in the active state
by the input reaches the set time
Tt so that the totaliser output switches to the active state for a set time when a pulse is detected
on the input
Possibly activate the Save on power failure parameter. It enables the timer to be restarted at the
point where it stopped after a power failure
From the front panel
From the PARAMETERS menu, you can set:
The value of the On time: pulse duration.
Illustration:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 118 sur 249
Totaliser Timing Diagrams
Function At:
Function Ht:
Function T:
Function Tt:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 119 sur 249
Parameter Modification
To modify the parameters from the controller front panel, check the Modification authorized box in the
Parameters window.
COMP IN ZONE Comparison
Description
The COMP IN ZONE comparison function is used to compare one value between two setpoints (the
MIN and MAX values of the zone).
Access
The
function is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The comparison function uses:
a discrete ENABLE FUNCTION input; this input is Active if it is not connected,
A VALUE TO COMPARE input whose type is Integer,
A MIN VALUE input, whose type is Integer,
A MAX VALUE input, whose type is Integer,
A discrete OUTPUT.
The OUTPUT indicates the result of the comparison when the ENABLE FUNCTION input is active.
The OUTPUT does not change state when the ENABLE FUNCTION input is inactive.
Parameters
From the Parameters window, you can select the state of the output according to the result of the
comparison:
ON in the zone: the output will be active if the input value is between the two setpoints (MIN and
MAX),
OFF in the zone: the output will be inactive if the input value is between the two setpoints (MIN and
MAX).
If MINI is greater than MAXI, then for:
ON in the zone: the output always remains inactive,
OFF in the zone: the output always remains active.
Comparison Function
The diagram below shows the different states the output can take, depending on the input value to
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 120 sur 249
compare and the enable input:
PRESET H-METER Preset Hour Counter
Description
The PRESET H-METER hour counter function measures the duration of input activation. When this
duration reaches a preset value, the output is activated.
The duration can be set in hours (Maxi 32767) and minutes.
Activation of the RESET input allows the output to be deactivated and the current values initialized.
Access
This function
is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The counter uses:
A discrete COMMAND input,
A discrete RESET input.
If these two inputs are not connected, they are set respectively to Active and Inactive.
The counter provides:
A discrete OUTPUT,
The copy of the setpoint of the number of hours (1),
The current value of the number of hours (1),
The copy of the setpoint of the number of minutes (1),
The current value of the number of minutes (1),
(1) these integer values are displayed in Simulation and Monitoring mode.
Parameters
You can set:
The preset Hour value, which is a value between 0 and 32767,
The preset Minute value, which is a value between 0 and 59.
If the Save on power failure parameter is selected, it enables the timer to be restarted at the point
where it stopped after a power failure.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 121 sur 249
Modification from the front panel
To modify the parameters from the front panel of the controller, check the Authorized modification
box of the Parameters window.
Schmitt Trigger
Description
The SCHMITT TRIGGER function allows an analog value to be monitored relative to two thresholds.
The output changes state if:
The input value is lower than the minimum value
The input value is higher than the maximum value
If the input is between the two, the output does not change state.
Each of the FROM ON TO OFF and FROM OFF TO ON setpoints can just as easily be the minimum or
maximum value. This involves reverse operation of the function. These two operations are shown in the
diagrams.
If the ENABLE input is in inactive state, the output remains inactive. The output does not change state
if the ENABLE input changes from Active to Inactive state.
Access
The
function is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The function uses four inputs:
A VALUE TO COMPARE Integer-type input
An ON TO OFF SETPOINT Integer-type input
An OFF TO ON SETPOINT Integer-type input
An ENABLE FUNCTION Discrete-type input
The function delivers a discrete OUTPUT.
Operating Diagrams
The figure shows the different states that the output can have in the case when the ON TO OFF
SETPOINT is > the OFF TO ON SETPOINT:
The figure shows the different states that the output can have in the case when the OFF TO ON
SETPOINT is > the ON TO OFF SETPOINT:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 122 sur 249
COMPARE Function for Comparing Two Analog Values
Description
The COMPARE function is used to compare two analog values.
Access
The
function is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The function uses:
an ENABLE FUNCTION Discrete-type input.
a VALUE 1 Integer-type input,
a VALUE 2 Integer-type input.
If the VALUE 1 or VALUE 2 input is not connected, the value is set to 0.
The function provides a discrete-type OUTPUT.
The output is active if the result of the comparison between VALUE 1 and VALUE 2 is true and if the
ENABLE FUNCTION input is active or not connected.
The output does not change state if the ENABLE FUNCTION input changes from Active to Inactive
state.
Parameters
The comparison operators that can be chosen from the Parameters window are:
Symbol
Description
>
Greater than.
≥
Greater than or equal to.
=
Equal to.
≠
Different.
≤
Less than or equal to.
<
Less than.
GAIN Function
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 123 sur 249
Description
The Gain function enables analog values to be converted by changing the scale and offset.
Gain calculation formula:
Access
The gain function
is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
Description of the inputs:
ENABLE FUNCTION: gain function input command, whose type is Discrete.
The state of this input determines operation of the block: if the ENABLE FUNCTION input is inactive,
the CALCULATION OUTPUT retains the last calculated value.
CALCULATION INPUT: value of the analog input connected to the gain function.
This is an integer between -32768 and 32767.
Description of the output:
CALCULATION OUTPUT: output value of the gain function.
This value depends upon the state of the ENABLE FUNCTION input.
If the ENABLE FUNCTION input is:
inactive, then the CALCULATION OUTPUT equals the last calculated value, when the ENABLE
FUNCTION input is inactive,
active, then the CALCULATION OUTPUT is equal to the result of the gain calculation formula.
Note: if the ENABLE FUNCTION input is not connected, then it is considered to be active.
Parameters
In the programming software
From the Parameters window, you can adjust:
A/B which corresponds to the gain applied by the function with:
A: being a numerator (from -32768 to 32767),
B: denominator (from -32768 to -1 and from 1 to 32767)
C which is the offset applied by the function, and is an integer between -32768 and 32767.
In addition, it is possible to define an operating range by setting limits for the function output:
Lower limit: integers between -32768 and 32767,
Upper limit: integers between -32768 and 32767.
From the front panel
From the PARAMETER menu, you can set the parameter values:
A: gain numerator
B: gain denominator (value 0 prohibited),
C: offset,
upper limit,
lower limit.
Illustration:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 124 sur 249
1 Name of the parameter displayed
2 Value of the parameter displayed
Parameter Modification
To modify the parameters from the front panel of the controller, check the Authorized modification
box of the Parameters window.
Display on the LCD DISPLAY Screen
Description
The DISPLAY function is used to display text, a date, a time or a numerical value on the LCD display
instead of the controller INPUTS-OUTPUTS screen:
The DISPLAY function is used to display information on the following:
Text (maximum 72 characters),
Numerical values corresponding to the output of a block function used in the application.
Up to 8 DISPLAY blocks can be enabled simultaneously in one program. If this number is exceeded,
only the first 8 blocks activated are displayed.
Pressing the green OK and red ESC keys simultaneously replaces the display on the DISPLAY screen
with the menu display.
Pressing the ESC key again returns the display to the DISPLAY screen.
Note: Both ASCII-standard characters and accented characters can be used.
Note: Characters and symbols that are not displayed in the data entry window when keyed are not
supported.
Access
The DISPLAY function
is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs
ENABLE FUNCTION: This is the Discrete-type DISPLAY function control input.
The state of this input determines block operation: if the ENABLE FUNCTION input is active, the
information is displayed on the LCD; otherwise there is no display.
If this input is not connected, then it is considered to be active.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 125 sur 249
VALUE INPUT: This is the selection input that determines the nature of the information to be
displayed. If this input is:
Not connected: The display corresponds to the selection made in the User options zone.
Connected to the output of a function block: The display corresponds to the value sent by this
output.
Parameters
The adjustable parameters depend on whether or not the VALUE INPUT is connected
1st case: VALUE INPUT not connected
The display corresponds to the selection made in the User options zone.
Depending on the options chosen, the following can be displayed:
Text: a string of characters
Date: the current value of the internal date of the device on which the program is executed
(controller or simulator)
Time: The current internal time value
Calibration: Drift value of the controller’s internal clock
2nd case: VALUE INPUT connected
The integer value present on the input is converted into a string of characters, whose display format
depends on the option that has been selected:
Integer 1/1 - 1/10000
Calendar date
Bar chart
Maxinumber
Description of the display modes:
Display mode
Description
1/1
Signed integer
1/10 - 1/10000
Signed decimal number; the fractional part represents the number of digits following the
decimal
Year
The input value must be between 1 and 99 corresponding to a display between 2001 and
2099.
Month
The input value must be between 1 and 12, corresponding to a display indicating the first four
letters of the name of the month.
Day of the month
The input value must be between 1 and 31.
Hour
The input value must be between 0 and 23. Two numbers are displayed.
Minute
The input value must be between 0 and 59. Two numbers are displayed.
Bar chart -> or <-
A bar is formed on the first line of the screen. The number of black squares, from left to right (>) or from right to left (<-) corresponds to the value of the input. For an input of eighteen the
line is completely filled. Beyond that, the line is filled by triangles pointing to the right (->) or to
the left (<-).
To take account of the interval in a numerical value, insert a Gain function between the value
and the DISPLAY block. For example to display a value between 0 and 1023 as a bar chart,
configure the Gain function with A=18, B=1023.
Maxinumber
The input value is displayed so that the full height of the screen is filled.
Example
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 126 sur 249
Note: For the formats Day of the month/Hour/Minute, no consistency check is carried out.
Modification authorized: Authorizes modification directly from the screen displaying the following
values:
The integer data connected to the VALUE INPUT of function blocks (Modification is only possible
if the data can be modified).
The controller's current internal date or time value.
Correction of the drift of the controller internal clock (this last action does not work in simulation
mode).
Operating mode
Description of the interface
Each display function is identified by a block number: BXX.
This identifier is found:
On the wiring sheet: The number is located at the top right corner of the block.
In the parameter setting window/Parameters tab: the number is in the drop-down menu in the top left
corner of the window.
The parameter setting window displays the resulting string from all blocks (BXX) used in the wiring
sheet.
The parameter setting window opens by default on the function block number from which the dialog box
was opened.
For the selected block, all text affecting it appears in red.
In the event of any overlap, the text appears in red reverse video mode.
The non-overlapping text corresponding to the other selected blocks appears in brown.
Entering one of the parameters of a DISPLAY block
Description of the entry procedure:
Step
Description
1
Is the VALUE INPUT connected?
If yes, then specify the display format.
If no, then enter text in the User options box.
2
Position the start of the text using the mouse:
3
Confirm using the green OK key.
Result: The new DISPLAY block is saved and the parameters window is closed.
Note: If the strings are superimposed, a warning is displayed in the grid: the boxes appear in red, all
valid strings are displayed in brown.
How to Modify Data from the Front Panel
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 127 sur 249
When the Modification authorized option is checked, it is possible to modify the data displayed
directly from the display screen by proceeding as follows:
Step
Action
1
Use the
and
keys to place the cursor on the data to modify.
2
Confirm by pressing the OK key
.
Result: The selected data flashes.
3
Use the
and
keys to scroll to the desired value.
4
Confirm by pressing the OK key
.
TEXT Function
Description
The Text automation function is used to display texts and/or numerical values (current value, preset
value, etc.) on the LCD display instead of the INPUTS-OUTPUTS screen:
Several text blocks can be used simultaneously in one program, but only the block with the highest
number is displayed.
Pressing the green OK and red ESC keys simultaneously replaces the display on the TEXT screen with
the main menu display.
Pressing the ESC key again returns the display to the TEXT screen.
Access
The
function is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs
The Text function has two discrete inputs:
Set: Activation of the Set input prompts the display.
Reset: Activation of the Reset input cancels the display. Reset has priority over Set.
The Text function has four 10-bit analog inputs which are displayable values.
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Character String Display
The cursor is positioned at the start of the string displayed in the window:
By left-clicking on the box (which then flashes)
By using the arrow keys on the computer keyboard
Description of the entry procedure:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Step
Action
1
Position the cursor at the start of the text.
2
Type the text to be displayed using the keyboard.
3
Confirm by clicking OK.
Page 128 sur 249
Result: The new Text block is saved and the parameter-setting window is closed.
Note: The character string is limited to four lines. If the user continues to enter characters, each
additional character overwrites the one in the last box.
Note: Both ASCII-standard characters and accented characters can be used. Characters and
symbols that are not displayed in the data entry window when keyed are not supported.
Note: If the text entered on a line covers an existing numerical value, the latter is deleted.
If a numerical value is positioned over text that has already been entered, the characters it covers
are overwritten.
Displaying a Numerical Value
Positioning:
To position the value on the line, simply drag and drop it to the edit window.
Selection:
The value to be displayed is selected in the window located above the edit window.
This window lists the following elements:
Date: The current value of the internal date (day.month.year) of the device on which the program is
executed (controller or simulator)
Hour: The current internal time value (hours:minutes)
Calibration: Drift value of the controller’s internal clock
List of displayable values, i.e. the function analog inputs
Clear Text
Description of the procedure:
Step
Description
1
Activate the zone to be cleared.
With the mouse: Left-click, move the mouse over the zone to be selected, holding down the left mouse
button, then release the button.
Result: The selected zone flashes.
2
Clear using the Delete key on the keyboard.
TIME PROG Programmer
Description
The TIME PROG daily/weekly/yearly programmer is used to enable the time slots during which actions
can be executed.
This function allows a maximum of 51 events to be defined, which are used to control its output.
Access
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
The TIME PROG function
Page 129 sur 249
is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Outputs
OUTPUT: this is the programmer validation output.
When one of the cycles that has been set up as a parameter is reached, the output is active (the output
remains active for the entire duration of this cycle.)
Parameters
In the programming workshop
A cycle is defined by:
The type of action: ON or OFF
The time at which it will take effect: Hour/Minute
The activation mode
Cycles can be activated in different ways:
Periodically: Triggering of an event on certain weeks of each month (weekly) or certain days of the
week (daily).
In this case, you will have access to a new set of choices:
Weekly: This choice is enabled by default and all weeks are selected, with the possibility of
selecting only certain weeks.
Daily: This choice is enabled by default and all days are enabled, with the possibility of selecting
only certain days (in which case the Daily option is no longer valid).
Date: Triggering of a single event on a specific date.
In this case the day, the month and the year should be configured (if necessary, click on the
calendar icon).
Annually: Triggering of an event once a year.
In this case, the month and the day should be configured (if necessary, click on the calendar icon).
Monthly: Triggering of an event once a month.
In this case, only the day should be configured (if necessary, click on the calendar icon).
Note: The weeks indicated in Weekly mode do not correspond to calendar weeks (Monday to
Sunday), but are instead defined in relation to the number of days since the start of the month (the
first seven days of the month form the first week).
Modification from the Front Panel
To modify the parameters from the controller front panel, check the Modification authorized box in the
Parameters window.
From the front panel, only the parameter values can be modified.
It is not possible to:
Add or delete an event
Modify the type (periodic, annual, monthly, and date)
Creating a Cycle
Procedure for creating a new cycle:
Step
Action
1
Create a new cycle by pressing the New button in the Parameters tab.
Result: A new event number appears in the Current cycle box.
2
Configure the time when the event should take place: Hour/Minute.
3
Configure the type of action: ON or OFF.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 130 sur 249
4
Configure the activation mode according to your criteria (by default, the cycle will be triggered every day at
the time indicated).
5
Confirm by clicking OK.
Result: The new cycle is saved and the parameter setting window is closed.
Modifying a Cycle
Procedure for modifying a cycle:
Step
Action
1
Select the cycle to modify using the Current cycle drop-down menu in the Parameters tab.
Result: The configuration of the selected cycle is opened.
2
Modify the required parameters.
3
Confirm by clicking OK.
Result: The new cycle is saved and the parameter setting window is closed.
Clearing a Cycle
Procedure for clearing a cycle:
Step
Action
1
Select the cycle to clear using the Current cycle drop-down menu in the Parameters tab.
Result: The configuration of the selected cycle is opened.
2
Clear the cycle using the Clear button.
Result: The cycle disappears from the drop-down menu.
3
Confirm by clicking OK.
Summary of the Configuration
To take stock of all the cycles created and the conditions that trigger them, simply select the Summary
tab and browse the list of the cycles configured.
The Clear button allows you to delete the designated cycle by clicking in the Summary tab list.
The Number button allows you to assign a new number (not yet used) to a designated event by clicking
in the Summary tab list.
To modify the characteristics of a cycle, simply double-click on the desired line: the parameter setting
window opens on the selected cycle.
Simulation and Monitoring Modes
Clock Configuration
In simulation mode, it is the clock specific to the simulator that is taken into account. This clock is
initialized during the switch to simulation mode with the time/date of the clock in the PC on which the
programming workshop is running.
The clock parameters can be modified subsequently:
Using the Read/Write date and time command on the controller menu
Using the CLOCK command in the MISCELLANEOUS choice, which can be accessed using the
buttons on the front panel
Using the Time Prog Jump Event window
Modifying the TIME PROG parameters
These parameters cannot be modified by opening the parameter setting window in Simulation and
Monitoring modes.
Bistable Impulse Relay Function
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 131 sur 249
Description
The BISTABLE impulse relay function switches the OUTPUT state on each rising edge (change from
inactive to active) of the COMMAND input.
Access
The impulse relay function
is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
Description of the inputs:
COMMAND: this is the input that controls changes in the output state, whose type is Discrete.
RESET: when this command is active, the OUTPUT always remains inactive, regardless of the
COMMAND input transitions.
Note: If the RESET input is not connected, it is considered to be inactive.
Description of the output:
OUTPUT: this is the impulse relay output, whose type is Discrete.
This value depends upon the state of the RESET input.
If the RESET input is:
Inactive: the OUTPUT changes state in line with the transitions of the COMMAND input,
Active: the OUTPUT always remains inactive.
MUX Multiplexing Function
Description
The MUX function carries out two input channel multiplexing on the OUTPUT.
Access
The multiplexing function
is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
Description of the inputs:
CHANNEL B: this is the multiplexer input A, whose type is integer.
CHANNEL B: this is the multiplexer input B, whose type is integer.
SELECTION: this input is used to choose the input channel to apply to the output.
Description of the output:
OUTPUT: this is the multiplexer output.
This value depends upon the state of the SELECTION input.
If the SELECTION input is:
inactive: the OUTPUT corresponds to CHANNEL A,
active: the OUTPUT corresponds to CHANNEL B.
Note: If the SELECTION input is not connected, then it is considered to be inactive.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 132 sur 249
Note: If CHANNELS A or B are not connected, then they are set to 0.
ADD-SUB Arithmetic Function
Description
The ADD-SUB Addition and/or Subtraction function enables simple operations to be carried out on
integers:
Addition,
Subtraction.
Calculation formula:
Access
The ADD-SUB function
is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
Description of the inputs:
INPUT 1: first input value of the formula (integer),
INPUT 2: second input value of the formula (integer),
INPUT 3: third input value of the formula (integer).
Note: If the INPUTS are not connected, they are set to 0.
ERROR PROPAGATION: this input, whose type is Discrete, is used to propagate errors (or
saturations) from calculation functions (ADD-SUB or MUL-DIV) carried out upstream.
Note: If ERROR PROPAGATION is at 1, then the operations are not performed and the
ERROR/OVERRUN output is set to 1.
Note: If ERROR PROPAGATION is not connected, it is set to 0.
Description of the outputs:
CALCULATION OUTPUT: this is the value of the calculation formula output (integer).
ERROR/OVERRUN: this output, whose type is Discrete, indicates any presence of saturation
errors).
This output is activated in the following cases.
The consequence of the operations is a result that is not included in the interval [-32768, +32767],
The ERROR PROPAGATION input is active.
Examples
Simple addition: simply do not use the INPUT 3 input.
Simple subtraction: simply do not use one of the INPUT 1 or 2 inputs.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 133 sur 249
MUL-DIV Arithmetic Function
Description
The MUL-DIV Multiplication and/or Division function enables simple operations to be carried out on
integers:
Multiplication,
Division.
Calculation formula:
Access
The MUL-DIV function
is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
Description of the inputs:
INPUT 1: first input value of the formula (integer).
INPUT 2: second input value of the formula (integer)
INPUT 3: third input value of the formula (integer)
Note: If the INPUTS are not connected, they are set to 1.
ERROR PROPAGATION: this input, whose type is Discrete, is used to propagate errors (or
saturations) from calculation functions (ADD-SUB or MUL-DIV) carried out upstream.
Note: If ERROR PROPAGATION is at 1, then the operations are not performed and the
ERROR/OVERRUN output is set to 1.
Note: If ERROR PROPAGATION is not connected, it is set to 0.
Description of the outputs:
CALCULATION OUTPUT: this is the value of the calculation formula output (integer).
ERROR/OVERRUN: this output, whose type is Discrete, indicates any presence of saturation
errors).
This output is activated in the following cases:
The consequence of the operations is a result that is not included in the interval [-32768, +32767],
The ERROR PROPAGATION input is active,
The INPUT 3 equals 0.
Examples
Simple multiplication: simply do not use the INPUT 3 input.
Simple division: simply do not use one of the INPUT 1 or 2 inputs.
CAM BLOCK Cam Programmer
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 134 sur 249
At a Glance
The cam programmer function CAM BLOCK controls a set of 8 built-in cam wheels.
On its 8 outputs (representing the 8 wheels), the function provides the state corresponding to the
current position of the shaft wheels.
The cam configuration can be set; for each position, output state is adjustable.
Once the maximum value has been reached, the cam restarts from its initial position (output returns to
0).
Access
The CAM BLOCK function
is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
Description of the inputs:
MOVE FORWARD: this is the input that controls cam progress; it moves one step forward at each
rising edge (change from inactive to active).
MOVE BACKWARD: this is the input that controls backward cam movement; it moves one step
backward at each rising edge (change from inactive to active).
Note: The MOVE FORWARD input takes priority over the MOVE BACKWARD input.
Note: If the MOVE FORWARD and MOVE REVERSE inputs are not connected, they are set to
inactive.
RESET (initialization): When this input is active, the cam is replaced to its initial position: the
POSITION output is forced to 0.
Note: The RESET input takes priority over the MOVE FORWARD and MOVE BACKWARD inputs.
Note: If the RESET input is not connected, it is set to inactive.
Description of the outputs:
OUTPUT 1 to 8: state corresponding to the current position of the shaft (representing the 8 wheels),
POSITION: current cam position (0 to 49).
Parameters
From the programming workshop
From the Parameters window, you may adjust:
The number of program steps: Its value is between 1 and 50,
Output status [1..8]: for each position of the shaft.
The following figure shows an example of a part of parameters window:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 135 sur 249
When selected, the Save on power fail parameter enables the current value of the timer to be
retrieved following a power failure.
Modification of Parameters from the Front Panel
To modify the parameters from the front panel of the controller, check the Authorized modification
box of the Parameters window.
From the PARAMETERS menu, it is possible to modify bit-wise the contents of all the cam programmer
steps, but it is not possible to modify the number of steps.
After you have entered the block number, then enter:
The step number: Value between [0..49],
Output status [1..8]: For each output one can set the value to INACTIVE (empty diamond) or
ACTIVE (black diamond).
ARCHIVE Function
Overview
The ARCHIVE data archiving function enables two values to be saved simultaneously with their datestamping information.
Access
The ARCHIVE function
is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
Description of the inputs:
LATCHING: This is the archive function command input (Discrete type) on each rising edge
(transition from inactive to active), the VALUE input is memorized.
If this input is not connected, then it is set to inactive.
RESET: When this input (Discrete type) is active, it forces the VALID ARCHIVE to inactive:
previously saved values are still available.
If this input is not connected, then it is set to inactive.
ARCHIVE VALUE 1: this is the first input that is saved. The whole value present on this input is
saved with its date-stamping information: time and date (all of this information is available on the
outputs).
If this input is not connected, then it is set to inactive.
ARCHIVE VALUE 2: second input saved
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 136 sur 249
If this input is not connected, then it is set to inactive.
Description of the outputs:
VALID ARCHIVE: this output (Discrete type) indicates the validity of the storage in process:
Inactive: no data available
Active: data available
MINUTE: minute value of the date-stamping information (0 to 59) (INTEGER type)
HOUR: hour value (0 to 23) (INTEGER type)
DAY: day value (1 to 31) (INTEGER type)
MONTH: month value (1 to 12) (INTEGER type)
YEAR: year value (0 to 99) (INTEGER type)
ARCHIVE 1: whole value present on the VALUE 1 input (INTEGER type)
ARCHIVE 2: whole value present on the VALUE 2 input (INTEGER type)
Parameters
From the programming workshop
When selected, the Save on power failure parameter enables the current value of the counter to be
retrieved following a power failure.
Storage Mechanism
If the LATCHING input is activated several times, only the data concerning the last activation is
memorized.
Display of Saved Values
Saved values can be displayed; in order to do this, simply connect the outputs of the ARCHIVE function
to the DISPLAY blocks.
The DISPLAY function can modify the displayed value if the Modification authorized parameter is
checked.
Note: Any modification risks damaging the consistency of the archived data: VALUE/DATE.
Controller STATUS
Description
This function allows the user to access the controller status and modify the behavior of its FBD and/or
SFC program according to particular states.
Only an alarm status is available (the warning can be retrieved by the application), as the error causes
the application to switch OFF and the status function block is therefore no longer executed.
Access
The
function is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
This function block does not have an input.
The function has seven outputs:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 137 sur 249
ALARM STATUS: Active as soon as an error or an alarm is detected in the controller. In this case,
the corresponding code is available on the ALARM NUMBER output. The only way to return this
output to inactive status and set the ALARM NUMBER to zero is to use the front panel FAULT menu
with the CLEAR and YES commands. Usage: Allows the user program to be put into a known
"fallback" state in the event of a fault.
MONITORING ON: Active when the user program is correctly executed on the controller and a
Monitoring session is activated from the programming workshop.
Otherwise, this output is inactive.
Usage: In this operating mode, the watchdog action in the configuration is systematically deleted
regardless of the programmer's initial choice. If in the user program, the watchdog action
(error/warning) is essential, this output allows the user program to be put into a known state with no
consequences (making no changes) for the outputs controlled.
PARAMETERS ON: Sends a pulse when the user program is correctly executed on the controller
and a parameters modification action is activated either from the programming workshop, or after
execution in the PARAMETER menu on the front panel of the LCD.
Otherwise, this output is inactive.
Usage: In this operating mode, the watchdog action in the configuration is systematically deleted
regardless of the programmer's initial choice. If, in the user program, the watchdog action
(error/warning) is essential, this output allows the user program to be put into a known state with no
consequences (making no changes) for the outputs controlled.
COLD START: Sends a pulse during the first execution cycle of a user program when it switches
from OFF to ON.
Usage: This pulse allows the programmer to insert specific initializations in his program, for example,
initializing the SFC "RESET-INIT" function, which confers saving on a power failure in the SFC chart
containing it.
WARM START: Sends a pulse during the first execution cycle of a user program when power is
restored following a power failure occurring when the program was in RUN mode.
Usage: This pulse lets the programmer insert specific initializations in his program once the power
has been restored.
FLASH CYCLE: Delivers a periodic signal that switches alternately from ON to OFF at each
execution of the user program (RUN mode). Its period is equal to twice the duration of the execution
period described in the configuration,
ALARM NUMBER: Provides the alarm code in signed integer format when the ALARM STATUS
output is active.
Note: In simulation mode, all outputs are significant.
You should note, however:
MONITORING ON is always active as it simulates functions resembling those of MONITORING.
COLD START corresponds to the simulation of the switch from OFF to ON.
WARM START is triggered by the end of a power failure simulation.
BIN/DEC Bits to Words Conversion
Description
The BIN/DEC function produces a 16-bit integer-type output from 16 inputs of the following type: Bit
Illustration:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 138 sur 249
Note: This function can, for instance, be used to transfer a discrete input or function status to a
Modbus output (O1XN ... O4XN) or Ethernet output type (O1ETH ... O8ETH).
Access
The
function is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
This function supports 16 discrete inputs: BIT01 (least significant byte) ... BIT16 (most significant byte).
This function supports one 16-bit integer-type output.
DEC/BIN Words-to-Bits Conversion
Description
The DEC/BIN function breaks down an integer (16-bit) type input into 16 bit-type outputs.
Illustration:
Note: This function can be used, for example, to break down a Modbus input (J1XN ... J4XN) or
Ethernet input (J1ETH ... J8ETH) and to duplicate these states on discrete outputs.
Access
The
function is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
This function supports 1 integer type 16-bit input:
This function supports 16 discrete outputs: BIT01 (least significant byte) ... BIT16 (most significant
byte).
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 139 sur 249
Serial Link Input
Description
The Serial Link Input function block transmits data via a serial link to fixed address memory locations
in the controller.
Access
The
function is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The function delivers eight Integer-type outputs named input1 to input8. These outputs allow the
application programmed in the controller to use the data stored in the chosen fixed address memory
locations.
Parameters
The user selects a range of eight addresses from the Parameters window. The address ranges
available are as follows:
1-8
9 - 16
17 - 24
The Serial Link
The serial link is configured as follows:
communication speed: 115 kbauds
format: 7 bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
The Write Frame and the Response
The write frame to send to the controller is the following:
Beginning delimiter: " : "
Slave address: 0x04
Write command: 0x10
Data address: 0x00 00 FF xx
xx is a number between 0x00 and 0x17 inclusive, corresponding to the address of the data item to
be written less 1.
Number of bytes: 0xnn
This is the number of data item to be written. Each value is made up of two bytes.
Data to be written: 0xd1H d1L d2H ... dnnL
There are 0xnn bytes to be written.
Checksum: 0xcc
This is the complementary sum increased by 1, of the bytes between the slave address and the last
of the data to be written.
End delimiter: " CR " " LF "
The controller response is structured as follows:
Start delimiter: " : "
Slave address: 0x04
Write command: 0x10
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 140 sur 249
Data address: 0x00 00 FF xx
Number of bytes: 0xnn
Checksum: 0xcc
This is the complementary sum increased by 1, of the bytes between the slave address and the byte
number.
End delimiter: " CR " " LF "
Example
Write to address 3 the 16-bit value 8569:
8569 corresponds to 0x2179 in hexadecimal format.
Checksum: 00x04+0x10 + 0x00 + 0x00+ 0xFF + 0x02 + 0x02 + 0x21 + 0x79 = 0x1B1 hence the
complement increased by 1 gives on a 0x4F byte
" : " 0x04 0x10 0x00 0x00 0xFF 0x02 0x02 0x21 0x79 0x4F " CR " " LF "
The frame in the format above is used to calculate the checksum. Except for the delimiters, each byte is
sent as two ASCII characters. Which gives:
0x3A 0x30 0x34 0x31 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x46 0x46 0x30 0x32 0x30 0x32 0x32 0x31 0x37
0x39 0x34 0x46 0x0D 0x0A
The controller response: 0x3A 0x30 0x34 0x31 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x46 0x46 0x30 0x32 0x30
0x32 0x45 0x39 0x0D 0x0A
What to Do in the Event of Loss of Communication
In the event of loss of communication, turn the controller power supply off and then on again. This
action should re-establish communication.
Serial Link Output
Description
The Serial Link Output function block is used to send data stored in fixed addresses in the controller
to other equipment via a serial link.
Access
The
function is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The function has eight Integer-type inputs. These inputs enable the application to write the data that
must be sent in the fixed address memory locations.
Parameters
The user selects a range of eight addresses from the Parameters window. The address ranges
available are as follows:
25 - 32
33 - 40
41 - 48
The Read Frame and the Response
The read frame to be sent to the controller is the following:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 141 sur 249
Start delimiter: " : "
Slave address: 0x04
Read command: 0x03
Data address: 0x00 00 FF xx
xx is a number between 0x00 and 0x2F inclusive, corresponding to the address of the first data item
to be read less 1.
Number of bytes: 0xnn
This is the number of data items to be read. Each value is made up of two bytes.
Checksum: 0xcc
This is the complementary sum increased by 1, of the bytes between the slave address and the
number of bytes.
End delimiter: " CR " " LF "
The controller response is structured as follows:
Start delimiter: " : "
Slave address: 0x04
Read command: 0x03
Number of bytes: 0xnn
Data read: 0xd1H d1L d2H ... dnnL
There are 0xnn bytes to be read.
Checksum: 0xcc
This is the complementary sum increased by 1, of the bytes between the slave address and the last
of the data items to be read.
End delimiter: " CR " " LF "
Example
Read 5 16-bit data items from address 17:
Hexadecimal frame before ASCII coding:
" : " 04 03 00 00 FF 10 0A E0 " CR " " LF "
Hexadecimal frame after ASCII coding:
3A 30 34 30 33 30 30 30 30 46 46 31 30 30 41 45 30 0D 0A
The response will be if the five values equal 0:
3A 30 34 30 33 30 41 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 45 46 0D 0A
What to Do in the Event of Loss of Communication
Loss of communication is a consequence of sending some incorrect frames to the controller. It is then
no longer possible to send data to the controller via the serial port or communicate with it from the
workshop. In this case, turn the controller power supply on and then off again. This action should reestablish communication.
Min Max Function
Description
The Min Max function extracts the minimum and the maximum of a signal.
Access
The Min Max function
is accessible from the FBD function bar.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 142 sur 249
Inputs/Outputs
Description of inputs:
Initialization: Initialization input of the Min Max function, of the Discrete-type.
Value: Value of the analog input connected to the Min Max function.
This is an integer between -32.768 and 32.767.
Description of the outputs:
The outputs depend on the state of the INITIALIZATION input.
If the Initialization input is inactive, then:
Minimum is equal to the minimum of the Value input from the last passage to the inactive state of
the initialization input,
Maximum is equal to the maximum of the Value input from the last passage to the inactive state
of the initialization input,
If the Initialization input is ON then the outputs are equal to the Values input.
Note: If the Initialization input is not connected, then it is considered to be inactive.
Message Function
Description
The Message function block, when activated, allows the following:
To send alarm messages to mobile telephones, toward the Millenium 3 Alarm alarm operations tool
or toward Email addresses via the M3MOD communication interface,
To provide remote access to a DISCR and/or a digital variable, to read or modify them.
It is possible to use up to 28 Message function blocks in the same program.
Note: The Message function is only available on controllers with a clock and when a M3MOD
communication interface is added to them.
For more information on the configuration of the M3MOD communication interface, see page
Configuration of the M3MOD Communication Via Modem Interface.
Access
This
function is accessible from the FBD function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The Message function block has the following inputs:
Enable function, depending on the configuration of the function block, the alarm message is sent
when a transition is detected on this input:
From the OFF status to the ON status (by default),
From the ON status to the Active status.
Val1, DISCR variable associated with this Message function block,
Val1, Digital variable associated with this Message function block.
The values of the variables connected to the Val1 and Val2 inputs may (according to the configuration
of the Message function block) be displayed in the alarm messages sent, and/or read and modified
using the commands sent from a mobile telephone or from the alarms operations tool.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 143 sur 249
The Message function block has an output. Each time the function block is enabled, a pulse is sent to
this output.
Configuration from the Programming Software
Double click on the function block to make the parameters window appear. Use the two Type and
Parameters tabs of this window to configure the block.
In the Type tab:
Select the type of the alarm message:
Alarm: Is used to send an alarm message on activation of the function block. The variables
associated with the block may be displayed in the message.
Modification of variables: Is used to provide access to a DISCR and/or a digital variable. Each of
these two variables may be declared as readable and modifiable.
Alarm with variable modification: Used to send an alarm message on activation of the function
block. The values of variables linked to the block may be displayed in the message and is used to
provide access to a DISRC variable and/or digital variable, each of these 2 variables may be
declared as readable and modifiable.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 144 sur 249
In the parameters tab:
Specify the alarm message recipients of this block. These recipients are chosen from the Directory of
Program Recipients.
To do this, proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Click on the button
message.
of the Message Recipient zone to add a recipient or modify the list of recipients of this
Result: The following window
appears:
These recipients are chosen from the Directory of Program Recipients.
2
For each new recipient to be added, select it in the directory of the program and click on the Send to -> button.
3
Organize the recipients in the order of priority by using the + and - buttons.
4
Double click on a recipient of the function to specify the types of commands that it will be authorized to execute:
Choose No to prevent a recipient from accessing variables connected to the Message function block,
Choose Read to enable a recipient to execute read commands for variables connected to the Message
function block,
Choose Modify to allow recipients to execute read and modify variables connected to the Message function
block: this choice is only available for recipients declared authorized to modify variables in the directory.
Note: For more information on sending commands, see the on-line help of the Millenium 3 Alarm alarm
operations tool and the user help document of the operations folder.
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
5
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
Configure the associated variables for the Message function block.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 145 sur 249
To do this, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Double click on the line of the DISCR variable, to access the Configure Connection window. This window is
used to:
Modify the alias of the variable,
Possibly make the variable readable and modifiable.
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
2
Double click on the line of the digital variable, to access the Configure Connection window. This window is
used to:
Modify the alias of the variable,
Possibly make the variable readable and modifiable,
Define a range of values possible for the variable, if a modify command is sent, the new value ought to be
found in this page, otherwise the command will not be processed,
Possibly define the conversion properties.
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
Define the Object and Body of Alarm Message (these 2 fields are not available if the type chosen is
Modify Variables).
It is possible to include the value of one or both variables associated with the function block in the body
of the message. To do so:
Select the variable in the list,
Drag and drop the variable into the zone of the message body.
Note: For GSM modems, to send an Email via SMS, the syntax to use in the subject and message
body is specific to each telephone operator. Contact the telephone operator of the SIM card of the
modem and refer to the section Sending an Email via SMS for further information.
Define the Condition for generating message (this field is not available if the type chosen is Modify
variables).
Choose:
OFF to ON Transition, so that the message will be sent when the Enable function input of the
Message function block switches to ON,
ON to OFF Transition, so that the message will be sent when the Enable function input of the
Message function block switches to OFF,
Conversion Properties
The conversion properties are used to facilitate reading the digital value linked to the Message function
block. They are used, for example, to convert the digital value of the program to express it in a physical
unit, and this converted value will be displayed in the message.
Example:
The internal variable Level (comprised between 0 and 32,767) represents the fill level of a tank
comprised between 0 and 3 m.
We can thus use the following conversion parameters:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 146 sur 249
If the value of Level is 32,767, the communication interface converts it into meters. The value that will
be sent in the alarm message will be 3.00 m
If the recipient wants to modify this variable, he sends the command level=1.50 m. The interface
converts the value and assigns to Level converted value 16,383.
Note: Additional information:
The field Physical unit is used to add a unit of its choice behind the converted value
The field Decimal pointis used to move the decimal in the converted value.
The basic type of conversion is only available for analog input values and is used to convert the
analog input voltage between 0 and 10 V directly in the desired amount.
Order of Priority
When sending an alarm message, the M3MOD communication interface contacts the message
recipients one after another. The Choose Recipients window is used to define the order in which the
message recipients are contacted.
Depending on whether the Recognition option is activated or not, two types of recipients may be
defined:
Recipient without recognition: The alarm message is systematically sent, then the communication
interface processes the next recipient,
Recipient with recognition (for mobile-type recipients only): The communication interface sends
the alarm message and waits for acknowledgement of the recipient via its mobile telephone:
If the recipient with recognition acknowledges the message, the communication interface
continues the send sequence only to recipients without recognition,
If the recipient with recognition does not acknowledgement the message in the given time
(Recognition delay), the communication interface processes the next recipient.
For more information on activating the Recognition option, see Creating a Recipient.
Configuration from the Front Panel
The Message function block cannot be configured from the front panel of the controller. This function
must be configured from the programming software.
SFC Functions
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 147 sur 249
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
This section provides information on the different SFC (Sequential Function Chart) functions using FBD
language.
What's in this Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Presentation of SFC Functions
Using the SFC Steps and Transitions
Use of AND Divergences
Use of OR Divergences
Use of AND convergences
Use of OR convergences
Using SFC loops
Initialization of an SFC at the Start of the Program
Initialization of SFC Charts
Re-initialization of an SFC in the Course of the Program
SFC Functions
SFC Initial Step
Resettable Step
SFC Step
Divergence to AND
Convergence to AND
Divergence to OR
Convergence to OR
Errors and Warnings Detected in an SFC Chart
Presentation of SFC Functions
General
SFC (Sequential Function Chart) functions are similar to Grafcet language, according to standard IEC
1131-3.
Grafcet is used to represent the functioning of a sequential automation operation in a structured and
graphic form.
The principle is simple: a graph containing SFC functions is read from top to bottom, and is principally
composed of:
Steps,
Transitions.
Steps are all placed in succession, and are controlled by transitions. When a step is active, you must
wait for the following transition to become active before carrying on to the following step. Associated
with each step is an action (OUTPUT), which sends orders to other functions (Discrete output / logical /
standard functions).
FBD Representation
The following diagram shows a Grafcet representation with SFC functions in FBD language:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 148 sur 249
Independent Charts
An independent chart is a set of SFC functions interconnected by input and output function links. Each
of the charts performs an automation function. In a wiring diagram it is possible to create various
independent charts.
The following diagram shows an example of two independent charts in a wiring diagram:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 149 sur 249
Using the SFC Steps and Transitions
Description
Steps and transitions can be used to represent and control consecutive operating phases.
Each operating phase is represented by a symbol called a step. When this operating phase takes
place, the step is said to be active. In this case the step is said by definition to contain a status token.
The step’s active status is seen by the setting to ON of a observation Discrete of the step.
For the operating phase to terminate, the phase ending must be authorized or commanded. For this, a
transition command Discrete input is set to ON.
The transition is then said to be passing and the status token crosses it. It therefore disappears from
the step and is led to the status token circulation output. Consequently, the observation Discrete is
set to OFF.
When the operating phase is terminated, the step becomes inactive and the observation Discrete
switches to OFF.
Illustration:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 150 sur 249
The switching off of an operating phase (B01) is immediately followed by the start-up of the following
operating phase (B02). The following operating phase is also symbolized by a new step, and its end is
also controlled by a transition.
Illustration:
To show the fact that the switching off of operating phase B01 is followed (in sequence) by operating
phase B02, the B01 status token circulation output is linked to one of the circulation inputs of the B02
status tokens.
In this case, when the switch to ON of the B01 transition command makes this passing, the token
present in the B01 step "falls" through the passing transition to the B02 step, where it stays as long as
the Discrete command input of the B02 transition remains set to OFF (blocked transition).
The Discrete observation output for the B02 step activity switches to ON. As soon as the B02 transition
becomes passing, the token now present in step B02 escapes by the status token circulation output,
the operating phase associated with the step of block B02 ends and the Discrete observation output of
step 2 switches to OFF.
Operation
The mechanism is broken down into four steps.
Phase 1, operation in progress: step 1 active (stable status)
End of operating phase 1: transition 1 active (momentary status)
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 151 sur 249
Phase 2, operation in progress: step 2 active (stable status)
End of operating phase 2: transition 2 active (momentary status)
If step 1 is inactive, the associated operating phase (B01) is not in progress, so the status token is not
present in step 1 by definition. Hence, switching the Discrete input command of transition 1 to ON,
causing the passing transition to have no effect as there is no token in step1, it cannot "fall".
The Discrete inputs controlling each transition and Discrete outputs that observe each step can be
connected to the other FBD blocks with Discrete inputs and outputs.
For example, a Boolean combination of inputs can command transition 1, a button can command
transition 2, the step 1 observation Boolean can switch a relay and the step 2 observation Boolean can
activate the message display.
Use of AND Divergences
Description
The AND divergence is used to represent and command simultaneous operating phases. This
representation of a string of operating phases describes the opposite mechanism to the AND
convergence.
An operating phase (B01) can be followed by two operating phases that take place at the same time,
and which assign, for example, two command devices to the same hardware.
To represent this operating mode, a function called AND DIVERGENCE TO 2 SFC BRANCHES (or
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 152 sur 249
DIV AND 2) is used, which is linked to two step functions that each symbolize one of the simultaneous
operating phases.
When the transition command input of block B01 is set to ON, the token, if present in step B01,
migrates from this step, through transition B01, then doubled into two tokens which, each one falling
into steps B03 and B04, show the activation of the two parallel operating phases.
Mechanism
End of operating phase 1 in progress: step B01 active (stable status)
End of operating phase 1: transition 1 active (momentary status)
Operation phases 2 and 3 simultaneously in progress: steps 3 and 4 active (stable statuses)
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 153 sur 249
Use of OR Divergences
Description
The OR divergence is used to sequence after an operating phase one or two operating phases from a
choice of two possible phases.
This representation of a string of operating phases describes the opposite mechanism to the OR
convergence (CONV-OR 2).
A B01 operating phase can be followed by two operating phases which form a non-exclusive
alternative: operating phase B02, B03 or both are activated at the end of operating phase B01.
To represent this operating mode, a function called OR DIVERGENCE WITH 2 SFC BRANCHES (or
DIV OR 2) is used, which is linked to two step functions that each symbolize one of the operating
phases for the choice available (B02 and/or B03).
If the status token is present in the step (operating phase B01), the choice is made by forcing to ON
one and/or the other of the command inputs of each B01 transition, which are respectively linked
downstream to steps B02 and B03.
This therefore causes the end of operating phase B01, the migration of the token from step B01,
through the passing transition(s) (the command input of which is set to ON) to the step connected to it.
Examples
Example 1: one of the two transitions available is active.
Phase 1, operation in progress: step B01 active (stable status):
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 154 sur 249
End of operating phase 1: B01 transition 2 active (momentary status):
Phase 3, operation in progress: step B03 active (stable status):
Example 2: both transitions are passing at once.
Phase 1, operation in progress: step B01 active (stable status):
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 155 sur 249
End of operating phase 1: B01 transition 1 and 2 active (momentary status):
Operating phase 2 and 3 in progress: steps B02 and B03 active (stable statuses):
Note: If you want the choice between the two following operating phases to be exclusive, one of the
two transitions must be commanded by an AND combining the command of the first transition with
the reverse of the command of the second transition.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 156 sur 249
Use of AND convergences
Description
The AND convergence is used to sequence a single operating phase after simultaneous operating
phases. This representation of a string of operating phases describes the opposite mechanism to the
AND divergence.
Two simultaneous operating phases (B01 steps 1 and 2) can be followed by a single operating phase,
which can only be triggered after the simultaneous end of both previous phases.
To represent this operating mode, an SFC function is used called AND CONVERGENCE WITH 2 SFC
BRANCHES (or CONV AND 2), which is linked to the two upstream step functions, each of which
symbolizes one of the simultaneous operating phases, and to a downstream step which symbolizes the
single phase which links onto the two previous operating phases.
Each of the tokens migrates from its respective step, through its associated transition, fuses into a
single token, which, falling into step B02, shows the activation of the next single operating phases.
Mechanism
Operating phase 1 and 2 in progress: B01 step 1 and 2 simultaneously active (stable status):
End of operating phase 1 and 2: transition B01 active (momentary status):
Phase 3, operation in progress: step B02 active (stable status):
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 157 sur 249
If a single token is present in one of the upstream steps and the other is empty (inactive), then even if
the transition is set to ON, nothing happens. The step containing the token stays active (Discrete
observation output of the step set to ON) and the downstream step (B03) stays inactive.
Phase 1, operation in progress: only step 1 is active (stable status) but step 2 is inactive:
Phase 1, operation in progress: transition B01 active (stable status):
Use of OR convergences
Description
The OR convergence is used to sequence a same operating phase after one or the other of two
previous operating phases (simultaneous or not). This representation of a string of operating phases
describes the opposite mechanism to the OR divergence (DIV OR 2).
Two operating phases, simultaneous or not, (steps B01 and/or B02) are followed by a single operating
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 158 sur 249
phase which can only be triggered after the end of one of the two previous phases (once transition B01
or B02 is set to ON).
To represent this operating mode, an SFC function is used called OR CONVERGENCE WITH 2 SFC
BRANCHES (or CONV OR 2), which is linked to the two upstream transitions, each of which control the
end of an operating phase (step B01, step B02), and to a downstream step (B03) which symbolizes the
single phase which is linked after one or the other of the two previous operating phases.
The first command input that makes a transition passing while the activation token is present in the
associated step, lets the token migrate to the downstream step (B03) which symbolizes the
commitment of operating phase 3.
Example
Example 1: transition 1 is made passing while operating phase 1 is in progress.
Phase 1, operation in progress: B01 step 1 active (stable status):
End of operating phase 1: transition B01 active (momentary status):
Phase 3, operation in progress: B04 step 1 active (stable status):
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 159 sur 249
Example 2: transition 1 and transition 2 are made simultaneously passing while operating phases 1
and 2 are simultaneously in progress.
Operating phases 1 and 2 simultaneously in progress: step B01 and B02 simultaneously active
(momentary status):
Simultaneous end of operating phases 1 and 2: transition B01 and B02 simultaneously active
(momentary status):
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 160 sur 249
Phase 3, operation in progress: step B04 active (stable status):
Using SFC loops
Description
Loops are used to build a sequence of operating phases without end.
Most PLCs are designed to operate by continually linking a sequence of operating phases after an
initialization phase. To create this link, the programmer must loop to itself "status token circulation"-type
links.
Example
End of operating phase 1 in progress: step B01 active (stable status)
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 161 sur 249
Initialization of an SFC at the Start of the Program
Description
On launching (initializing) the program containing an SFC, you must know which operating phase
needs to be activated first, and therefore which step contains a status token at the time of initialization.
To show this step in the chart, it is essential to use at least one SFC function called INITIAL SFC STEP
(INIT STEP) or RESETTABLE INITIAL SFC STEP (RESET-INIT) per independent SFC.
An independent SFC is a set of SFC functions connected together by links between the token
inputs/outputs (circulation of status tokens).
On launching the user program (once the INITIALIZE AND SWITCH ON order is executed):
All charts that contain one or more INITIAL SFC STEP (INIT STEP) functions are automatically
initialized. This or these INIT STEP functions contain a status token which symbolizes the same
number of active operating phases.
All other steps belonging to the other functions contain no token, and all the operating phases they
symbolize are inactive.
This automatic initialization also takes place on restart after a power outage. The positions the status
tokens had at the time of the power outage are lost,
In all the charts containing a RESET-INIT function, it is now MANDATORY, RIGHT AT THE START
OF THE PROGRAM, to place an ON signal on the REINITIALIZATION input, and to disable the
module OUTPUTS which may be subject to interference. On restart after a power outage, the
positions the status tokens had at the time of the power outage are restored.
Example
Example 1: SFC with two INIT STEP functions.
Initialization and switch on of the program, initial operating phases 1 and 2 simultaneously in progress,
step B01 and B02 simultaneously active (stable statuses)
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 162 sur 249
Example 2: two independent SFC each have an INITIAL SFC STEP function.
Initialization and switch on of the program, initial operating phases 1 and 2 simultaneously in progress,
step B01 and B02 simultaneously active in two independent SFCs (stable statuses)
Initialization of SFC Charts
At a Glance
A program containing one or more SFC charts must be initialized when launched. To perform this
initialization you must insert at least one INIT STEP function or a RESET-INIT function in each of the
independent charts.
If a chart contains the RESET-INIT function, it can also be initialized when the program is running.
Initialization at Startup or on Power Return
On program startup, when the Initialize and switch on command is executed, or when power is
restored, the following occurs:
All the STEP OUTPUTS of the INIT SFC or RESET-INIT functions are activated and all the other
chart functions are deactivated,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 163 sur 249
The former step states are lost.
If a chart contains a RESET-INIT function, the steps are restored to the states they were in at the time
of the power outage.
CAUTION
RESET-INIT function
At the start of an SFC chart it is mandatory to connect an ON input to the RESET input of
the RESET INIT function and to disable the outputs of the controller which are
dependent on the outputs of the SFC chart steps.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.
CAUTION
RESET input
At the start of an SFC chart it is mandatory to connect to the REINITIALIZATION input of
the RESET INIT function the COLD START output for the STATUS function and to
disable the outputs of the controller which are dependent on the outputs of the SFC chart
steps.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.
Initialization in Progress
When a program containing one or more independent SFC charts is running, a chart containing the
RESET-INIT function can be reset independently of the other SFC charts. This initialization is
performed by activating the REINITIALIZATION of the RESET-INIT function which achieves the
following:
All the STEP OUTPUTS of the INIT SFC and RESET-INIT functions are activated and all the other
chart functions are deactivated,
The functions of the other independent charts are not affected.
As long as the REINITIALIZATION is active, the steps are forced as described above regardless of the
transition values of the chart functions.
Re-initialization of an SFC in the Course of the Program
Description
Over the course of the program containing one or more independent SFCs, a chart containing the
RESET-INIT function can be reinitialized independently from the other SFCs. This initialization is
triggered by setting to ON the Discrete input called REINITIALIZATION of the RESET-INIT function.
This input can be connected to the other FBD blocks using Discrete outputs. For example, a Boolean
combination of inputs can command this initialization input.
During execution of the user program, once the REINITIALIZATION input of the RESET-INIT function
switches to ON, each INIT STEP function and the RESET-INIT function belonging to the same SFC
each contain a status token that symbolizes the same number of active operating phases.
All other steps belonging to the other functions of the same SFC contain no token: all the operating
phases they symbolize are inactive.
All other functions belonging to other SFCs independent from the previous one are not assigned.
As long as the REINITIALIZATION input is set to ON, the steps are forced as described above without
taking into account the values applied to the command inputs associated with all transitions of the chart
functions.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 164 sur 249
Example
One SFC has an INIT STEP function and a RESET-INIT function, a second SFC independent from the
first contains a single RESET-INIT function, a third SFC independent from the first two contains no INIT
STEP function.
Initialization while the program is on. Initial phases 1 and 2 simultaneously in operation, as Clear input
of B01 block set to ON. Steps B01 and B02 simultaneously active in the first SFC (stable status). Steps
B06 and B09 active in the other two charts are not affected.
Initialization while the program is on. Initial phase 4 underway, as REINITIALIZATION input of B04
block set to ON. Step B04 active in the second SFC (stable status). Steps B03 and B08 active in the
other two charts are not affected.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 165 sur 249
SFC Functions
At a Glance
The following table shows the different functions that make up an SFC program:
Name
Symbol
Description
Initial Step
Initial step of an SFC chart.
Resettable initial
step
Initial step of an SFC chart with initialization of the step by
command.
Initializes the entire connecting chart containing the reset init.
Step
Step which transmits an order to another FBD function.
AND Divergence
Transition of one or two steps toward two steps.
AND
Convergence
Transition of two simultaneous steps toward one step.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 166 sur 249
OR Divergence
Transition of a step toward one or two steps.
OR Convergence
Transition of one to four steps toward a single step.
SFC Initial Step
Description
The INIT STEP function is an initial step of an SFC chart. It operates normally as follows:
If INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 is active, then the STEP OUTPUT is activated and remains active even after
the inputs have disappeared,
If the TRANSITION input is active, then the STEP OUTPUT is deactivated and the STEP
TRANSITION OUTPUT is activated,
If none of the inputs is active and only the STEP OUTPUT is inactive, then the output remains
inactive.
Note: An SFC chart must have at least one INIT STEP function. Each of the program's independent
charts can contain several INIT STEP functions.
If there is no RESET INIT function in the SFC chart, then the INIT STEP function is automatically
initialized in the following cases:
Beginning of a simulation session,
when switching to ON mode,
when normal operation is resumed following a power failure.
Access
The
function is accessible from the SFC function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The function uses:
Two inputs INPUT 1 and INPUT 2 to activate the step output,
A TRANSITION input to activate the step located downstream from this one.
Note: If not connected, inputs are in inactive state.
The function provides:
A STEP OUTPUT,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 167 sur 249
A STEP TRANSITION OUTPUT.
Resettable Step
Description
The RESET INIT function can be used, when the RESET function is activated:
to activate the STEP OUTPUT for the function, which is the initial step of the SFC chart,
and to reinitialize all of the other active steps in the chart to which it belongs.
If the RESET input is not active, it operates in the following manner:
If INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 is active, then the STEP OUTPUT is activated and remains active even after
the inputs have disappeared,
If the TRANSITION input is active, then the STEP OUTPUT is deactivated and the STEP
TRANSITION OUTPUT is activated,
If none of the inputs is active and only the STEP OUTPUT is inactive, then the output remains
inactive.
During a power failure, this function enables current values of the chart to be saved and retrieved when
power is restored.
Note: An SFC chart can have only one RESET function. Each of the program's independent charts
can contain only one RESET INIT function.
Access
The
function is accessible from the SFC function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The function uses:
Two inputs, INPUT 1 and INPUT 2 to activate the step output,
A RESET input for the program and its steps,
A TRANSITION input to deactivate the step located downstream from this one.
Note: If not connected, inputs other than RESET are in inactive state.
The function provides:
A STEP OUTPUT,
A STEP TRANSITION OUTPUT.
Warning
CAUTION
RESET input
At the start of an SFC chart it is mandatory to connect to the REINITIALIZATION input of
the RESET INIT function the COLD START output for the STATUS function and to
disable the outputs of the controller which are dependent on the outputs of the SFC chart
steps.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 168 sur 249
SFC Step
Description
The STEP function is a step of an SFC chart. The step symbolizes an operational phase of a control
device or PLC.
An action is connected to each STEP OUTPUT to transmit commands to other functions (Discrete,
logical, standard output). It operates in the following manner:
If INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 is active, then the STEP OUTPUT is activated and remains active even after
the inputs have disappeared,
If the TRANSITION input is active, then the STEP OUTPUT is deactivated and the STEP
TRANSITION OUTPUT is activated,
If none of the inputs is active and only the STEP OUTPUT is inactive, then the output remains
inactive.
Access
The
function is accessible from the SFC function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The function uses:
Two inputs INPUT 1 and INPUT 2 to activate the step output,
A TRANSITION input to activate the step located downstream from this one.
Note: If not connected, inputs are in inactive state.
The function provides:
A STEP OUTPUT,
A STEP TRANSITION OUTPUT.
Divergence to AND
Description
The DIV AND 2 function enables a transition of one or two steps to be simultaneously made toward two
steps.
If INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 of DIVERGENCE TO AND is active, then OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 OF
DIVERGENCE TO AND are activated,
If none of these inputs is active, then OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 OF DIVERGENCE TO AND are
inactive.
Access
The
function is accessible from the SFC function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The function uses two inputs that allow activation of the transition outputs:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 169 sur 249
INPUT 1 OF DIVERGENCE TO AND,
INPUT 2 OF DIVERGENCE TO AND.
Note: If not connected, inputs are in inactive state.
The function provides two outputs:
OUTPUT 1 OF DIVERGENCE TO AND,
OUTPUT 2 OF DIVERGENCE TO AND,
Convergence to AND
Description
The CONV AND 2 function enables a transition of two steps to be simultaneously made toward one
step.
If INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 is active, then STEP OUTPUT 1 OF CONVERGENCE TO AND is activated
and remains active even after the inputs have disappeared,
If INPUT 3 or INPUT 4 is active, then STEP OUTPUT 2 OF CONVERGENCE TO AND is activated
and remains active even after the inputs have disappeared,
If STEP OUTPUT 1 OF CONVERGENCE TO AND and STEP OUTPUT 2 OF CONVERGENCE TO
AND are active and the TRANSITION input is also active, then:
STEP OUTPUT 1 and STEP OUTPUT 2 OF CONVERGENCE TO AND are deactivated,
The TRANSITION OUTPUT is activated.
If none of these inputs is active, then STEP OUTPUT 1 and STEP OUTPUT 2 OF CONVERGENCE
TO AND are inactive,
If the TRANSITION input is active but STEP OUTPUT 1 or STEP OUTPUT 2 OF CONVERGENCE
TO AND is inactive, STEP OUTPUT 1 or STEP OUTPUT 2 OF CONVERGENCE TO AND does not
change state and the TRANSITION OUTPUT remains inactive.
Access
The
function is accessible from the SFC function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The function uses:
Two inputs INPUT 1 and INPUT 2 to activate step output 1,
Two inputs INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 to activate step output 2,
A TRANSITION input to activate the step located downstream from this one.
Note: If not connected, inputs are in inactive state.
The function provides:
A STEP OUTPUT 1 OF CONVERGENCE TO AND,
A STEP OUTPUT 2 OF CONVERGENCE TO AND,
A TRANSITION OUTPUT.
Divergence to OR
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 170 sur 249
Description
The DIV OR 2 function enables a transition of one step to be simultaneously made toward one or two
steps.
If the STEP INPUT 1 or STEP INPUT 2 is active, then the STEP OUTPUT is activated,
If the TRANSITION INPUT 1 and the STEP OUTPUT is active:
The STEP OUTPUT is deactivated,
TRANSITION OUTPUT 1 WITH DIVERGENCE TO OR is activated.
If the TRANSITION INPUT 2 and the STEP OUTPUT is active:
The STEP OUTPUT is deactivated,
TRANSITION OUTPUT 2 WITH DIVERGENCE TO OR is activated.
If the TRANSITION 1 and TRANSITION 2 inputs are active and the STEP OUTPUT is active:
The STEP OUTPUT is deactivated,
The TRANSITION OUTPUT 1 WITH DIVERGENCE TO ORand the TRANSITION OUTPUT 2
WITH DIVERGENCE TO OR are activated.
Access
The
function is accessible from the SFC function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The function uses:
Two inputs, INPUT 1 and INPUT 2 to activate the step output,
Two inputs, TRANSITION 1 and TRANSITION 2 to activate the transition step output(s).
Note: If not connected, inputs are in the inactive state.
The function provides:
A STEP OUTPUT,
A TRANSITION OUTPUT 1 WITH DIVERGENCE TO OR,
A TRANSITION OUTPUT 2 WITH DIVERGENCE TO OR.
Convergence to OR
Description
The CONV OR 2 function enables a transition of one to four step(s) to be simultaneously made toward
one step.
If INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 or INPUT 3 or INPUT 4 OF CONVERGENCE TO OR is active, then the
OUTPUT OF CONVERGENCE TO OR is activated,
If none of these inputs is active, then the OUTPUT OF CONVERGENCE TO OR is inactive.
Access
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
The
Page 171 sur 249
function is accessible from the SFC function bar.
Inputs/Outputs
The function uses four input s that allow activation of the transition output.
INPUT 1 OF CONVERGENCE TO OR,
INPUT 2 OF CONVERGENCE TO OR,
INPUT 3 OF CONVERGENCE TO OR,
INPUT 4 OF CONVERGENCE TO OR.
Note: If not connected, inputs are in the inactive state.
The function provides an OUTPUT OF CONVERGENCE TO OR.
Errors and Warnings Detected in an SFC Chart
At a Glance
When editing a chart, you can cause structural errors. The workshop detects them and generates
errors and warnings when:
Switching from Edit mode to Simulation mode,
Switching from Edit mode to Monitoring mode,
Using the following commands:
Controller → Write to the controller,
Controller → Compare the controller data with the program,
Edit → Check the program.
In all cases, the workshop displays a dialog box in the "Compilation results" window with a list of Errors
and/or Warnings, and puts a red frame around the function(s) where errors have been found.
The SFC errors are displayed in bold red on the wiring sheet.
Errors
The following table describes the errors according to their numbers:
Type of error
Description
Error 60
An SFC does not have an initial INIT STEP function, and no resettable initial RESET INIT function.
No step will be active when the program is initialized.
Error 61
An independent SFC has several resettable initial RESET INIT functions.
Warnings
The following table describes the warnings according to their numbers:
Type of warning
Description
Warning 70
This warning is generated if several warnings of different types are detected.
Warning 71
This warning is generated if an SFC function output is linked directly to several SFC function inputs.
The AND Divergence function DIV AND can be used to clear this error.
Warning 72
This warning is generated if:
An output from an SFC function is not connected to another function,
None of the inputs from an SFC function except RESET INIT and INIT STEP are connected to a
function.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 172 sur 249
FBD Programming
Overview
Aim of This Chapter
This chapter describes the different functions that can be accessed from the programming workshop in
FBD mode.
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
Creating an FBD Application in the Programming Workshop
Manipulating FBD Objects
Debugging / Monitoring an FBD Application in the Programming Workshop
Creating an FBD Application in the Programming Workshop
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
This section describes the different functions linked to programming in the programming workshop in
FBD mode.
What's in this Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Configuring FBD Program Editing
Inserting Function Blocks
Creating Links between Function Blocks and/or MACRO
Function Block Parameters
Display Options
Draw
Find
Display Dependencies
Use of Application-Specific Functions
Configuring FBD Program Editing
At a Glance
Before creating an FBD program, you must first set up several options to facilitate editing, such as:
Modifying the linking colors,
Defining the wiring mode,
Displaying the editing grid.
Linking Colors
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 173 sur 249
The programming workshop can be used to define different colors to display the following:
Links between function blocks,
Inputs/outputs,
Forced values in Simulation and Monitoring mode,
The background colors of the edit and supervision windows.
Note: It is also possible to configure colors from the File/Preferences menu.
Modifying a Color
The following table shows the procedure for modifying colors:
Step
Action
1
From the Options menu, select the command Modify the colors.
Result: the Define the link colors window appears.
2
Click the Modify button to the right of the color you wish to modify.
Result: the Colors window appears.
3
Select the new color to apply.
Result: the Colors window appears.
4
Confirm with OK.
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to modify the other colors.
6
Click the Apply to document button to confirm the new configuration.
Wiring Mode
The links between the function blocks can be of the following type:
Wire by clicking Tools → Wiring mode → Wire,
Text by clicking Tools → Wiring mode → Text, The text is inserted by default, and can be modified
later.
Note: The text displayed at the beginning and end of the link is Lxx type by default (e.g. L04) but can
be modified.
Once the type of link is selected, all new links created will be of the selected type.
The following diagram shows an example of a program with wire- and text-type links:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 174 sur 249
Note: Wire mode linking is the default setting on opening the workshop.
Type of wiring
The Type of wiring option (wire or text) is only used to modify the selected link:
Either by clicking Tools → Type of wiring,
Or by right-clicking.
Displaying the Grid
To help you align blocks in the wiring sheet, you can display a grid by clicking Display → Grid.
Inserting Function Blocks
At a Glance
To create an FBD program, you must insert various function blocks in the wiring sheet, then link these
together.
The Edit mode is the default mode on opening the application. This is generally accessible by clicking
menu:Mode → Edit during programming, to switch from one mode to another.
All types of blocks can be placed on the sheet, (including the IN inputs and the OUT outputs).
The only restrictions apply to IN blocks and OUT blocks that can only be positioned on their dedicated
squares.
If there is an incompatibility, it will not be possible to place the block. When the plot is empty, an error
message is displayed. If the plot already has a block, a barred circle appears.
Inserting Function Blocks
The following procedure describes how to insert a function block in a wiring sheet:
Step
Action
1
Select the type of function to insert.
IN,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 175 sur 249
FBD,
SFC,
Logic,
OUT.
2
Left-click on the icon corresponding to the function to insert.
3
Drag/drop the selected icon to the wiring sheet.
4
Position the function in the required location on the wiring sheet.
5
Repeat steps 2 to 5 to insert all the functions required for the program.
Input Blocks
Note: The following input blocks can only be inserted in the input squares on the left of the wiring
sheet:
Discrete input,
Filtered discrete input,
Analog input,
Filtered analog input,
Integer input.
Plot Position
The positions or relative positions of the input and output plots can be changed in order to make the
wiring diagram as clear as possible. To do this, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Extend the wiring surface if necessary.
2
Designate the plot to move:
left click on the blue bar of the plot if it contains the drawing of an IN or OUT type block, and keep the
mouse button pressed down,
left click anywhere on the plot if it is empty, and keep the mouse button pressed down,
3
Move the plot to the required space, release the mouse button.
Creating Links between Function Blocks and/or MACRO
Overview
After positioning the function blocks in the wiring sheet, you have to link them together. If you have
created MACROS, they should be connected similarly. You can link an output of a block (function block
or MACRO) to an input of another block or to loop an output back to an input on the same block.
How to Connect one Block to Another
The following procedure shows how to connect one block to another:
Step
Action
1
Left-click on an output of a block.
Result: The mouse cursor is displayed as a star.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
2
Keep the left button held down.
3
Continuing to hold down the button, move the cursor over a block input.
Page 176 sur 249
Result: The cursor is displayed as a star.
If when moved over the input of a block, the cursor is shown as a circle with a line through it, this means that
the link destination is not correct (incompatible types).
4
Release the mouse button.
Result: A line or numbers are shown between the two linked blocks.
How to Change the Start Point of a Link
The following procedure shows how to change the start point of a link
Step
Action
1
Select the link by clicking on it with the mouse.
Illustration
2
Press the Shift key.
3
Holding down the Shift key, use the mouse to select the end of the link to be modified.
Result: The cursor is displayed as a star.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
4
Page 177 sur 249
Keep the left button held down.
Note: At this stage the Shift key can be released.
5
Continuing to hold down the button, drag the cursor over the input or output of another block.
Result: The cursor is displayed as a star.
If when moved over the input of a block, the cursor is shown as a circle with a line through it, this means that
the link destination is not correct (incompatible types).
6
Release the mouse button.
Result: A line or numbers are shown between the two linked blocks.
How to Connect one Block to Several Others
The following procedure shows how to connect one block to several others:
Step
Action
1
Press the Ctrl key.
2
Holding down the Ctrl key, left-click on an output of a block.
3
Holding down the Ctrl key and the left mouse button, move the cursor over a block input.
Result: The cursor is displayed as a star.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
4
Page 178 sur 249
Holding down the Ctrl key, release the mouse button.
Result: A line or numbers are shown between the two linked blocks and another dotted line appears.
5
Continuing to hold down the Ctrl key, move the cursor over another block input.
Result: The cursor is displayed as a star.
6
Continuing to hold down the Ctrl key, click on another block input.
Result: Another link is created.
7
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to create as many links as necessary.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 179 sur 249
necessary.
8
Release the Ctrl key and click anywhere on the wiring sheet.
Types of Link
Depending on the type of data traveling along the link, there are different types of link.
By default the links are represented as follows:
Discrete data: Continuous black line
Signed integers between -32768 and +32767: Black double line
Link between SFC function blocks: Black interwoven lines
The following characteristics of the links’ appearance are modifiable:
Color
Type of wiring (Text or wire)
Text of a link
How to Modify the Color of Links
To modify the color of links, use Menu:Options → Modify colors → Color of links
How to Modify the Type of Wiring
The following procedure shows how to change the appearance of a link.
Step
Action
1
Select the link whose type is to be changed.
2
Select Menu:Tools → Type of wiring.
3
Select the Wiring command to change the text link into a wiring link or
Select the Text command to change the wiring link into a text link.
Result: The link changes type.
How to Modify the Link Text
The following procedure describes how to modify the text of the link between function blocks:
Step
Action
1
Click on one of the two texts of the link whose text is to be changed.
2
Select the Tools → Type of wiring → Modify text command.
Result: The Modify Link Text window is displayed.
3
Enter the new text.
4
Confirm with OK.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 180 sur 249
Function Block Parameters
At a Glance
Each of the function blocks has a parameters window. This window consists of one, two or three tabs:
Comments for all function blocks,
Parameters depending on the function block type (FBD PRESET COUNT),
Summary depending on the function block type (FBD TIME PROG).
Simply double click on the function block to access this window.
Comments Tab
Comments
In the Comment zone you can enter a comment of up to three lines of a maximum of 16 characters.
On Inputs/Discrete Outputs and Analog Inputs function blocks, from the comment tab you can also
choose the type of function block symbol that will be displayed in the wiring sheet.
When a comment has been added to a function block, an envelope symbol is displayed to the bottom
right of the block.
Two scenarios may arise:
If you click on this symbol the content of the comment zone is displayed,
If the Display the comment box of the block is checked the block's comment is permanently
displayed.
Block number
The following option is also available: Display the block number on the comment tab. This option is
activated by default.
Symbols used for block
For certain types of block, you can choose specific symbols to be used when shown in the wiring sheet
(FBD DI, OUT).
When this function is available, the list of available icons is shown in a menu at the bottom of the
window.
To change the icon, simply double click on the desired symbol.
Parameters
Most function blocks have a parameters tab. In this tab, you have to set the function block's specific
parameters. These parameters are described in detail in the help for each of the blocks.
Summary
Some function blocks also have a Summary tab (FBD TIME PROG). This window lists all the actions
configured for the block. It provides you with an overview of the configuration.
Display Options
At a Glance
For an FBD program, several different display options are available with:
Comments,
Zoom,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 181 sur 249
Block numbers.
Comments
All of the function blocks can have an associated comment. These comments are displayed above the
block in the wiring sheet.
You can choose to display:
The comment for a block,
All comments with the command Display → Comment → All,
No program comment Display → Comment → None.
Displaying a Comment
The following table shows the procedure for displaying a function block comment:
Step
Action
1
Select the block.
2
Click on the icon; if a comment is associated with the block, the icon is visible.
Result: The comment for the block is displayed.
Zoom Function
The command Display → Zoom allows you to use the zoom to display a part of the program in detail.
Block Numbers
As with the comments, you can choose to display the program function block numbers.
All of the function block numbers with the command Display → Block numbers → All,
None of the program function block numbers Display → Block numbers → None.
Draw
Overview
In the edit and supervision sheet, you can create square, ellipse or line forms or text. You can also
insert an image in Bmp format.
The line width (3 widths), line color and background color can also be changed.
Creating a Drawing
The table below shows the procedure for inserting a drawing in the wiring or supervision sheet:
Step
Action
1
Select the Draw menu.
2
Select the type of drawing to be created:
Line
Rectangle
Ellipse
Text
3
Draw the desired form in the wiring or supervision sheet.
4
If you selected Text, double-click on the object created and enter the text.
Inserting an Image
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 182 sur 249
The table below shows the procedure for inserting an image in the wiring or supervision sheet:
Step
Action
1
Select the Draw menu.
2
Select Image.
Result: The Open window appears.
3
Select the image file in bmp format.
4
Confirm with Open.
5
Left-click on the wiring or supervision sheet.
Result: A dotted zone the size of the image appears.
6
Place the zone corresponding to the image on the wiring or supervision sheet.
7
Release the left mouse button.
Result: The image appears.
Border
You can create a drawing that is a rectangle or ellipse with or without a border. By default, the border
option is selected. If you would like to remove it or confirm your choice, use the Draw → Border
command. The border color can be modified in the same way as that of a line.
Line Width
The table below shows the procedure for changing a line width or border of a drawing:
Step
Action
1
Select the drawing to modify.
2
Select the Width sub-menu from the Draw menu.
3
Choose the width type.
single line
double line
triple line
Result: The drawing width is modified.
Background Color
The table below shows the procedure for changing the background color of a drawing:
Step
Action
1
2
Select the drawing to modify.
Select the Background Color icon.
Result: The Color window appears.
3
Choose the new background color.
4
Confirm with OK.
Line and Border Color
The table below shows the procedure for changing the color of borders and lines in a drawing:
Step
Action
1
Select the drawing to modify.
2
Select the Line Color icon.
Result: The Color window appears.
3
Choose the new line color.
4
Confirm with OK.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 183 sur 249
Find
Overview
The Find command is used to find the following in the edit and supervision windows:
A function block, from its comment or name
A link, from its name
Procedure
The following table shows the procedure for using the Find function:
Step
Action
1
Select the Find command from the Edit menu.
Result: the Find window appears.
2
Enter the string of characters to be found in the Find zone.
3
Check the Whole word only box so that the search is carried out only on the string to be found.
4
Check the Match case box so that the search takes the case into account (upper and lower
case letters).
5
Launch the search by pressing Next.
Result:
If the search is successful, the function block is highlighted in the window.
If the search is not successful, the No block found window appears.
6
Relaunch the search by pressing Next until the No more blocks window is displayed.
Display Dependencies
Description
Display Dependencies highlights all blocks that depend on a given starting point. The starting point is
a block or a link. All blocks forming a path originating from a starting point and ending at outputs are
indicated by a blue frame around the block.
In the following example, the starting point is the block B05:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 184 sur 249
How to Display Dependencies
To display dependencies, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Click on the
2
button.
Click on the starting point which may be either:
a block or
a link
How to Cancel It
To cancel display dependencies, click again on the
button.
Use of Application-Specific Functions
Overview
The programming workshop in FBD mode can be enhanced with additional function blocks called
application-specific functions.
What is an Application-Specific Function?
An application-specific function is an optional function which can be added to the FBD_C function bar
and introduced into an application in the form of function blocks. If an application-specific function is
used in an application, its associated binary file must be written in the controller. Each binary file uses a
space in the controller memory, which is characterized by a number of slots.
Example: HIGH SPEED COUNT is an application-specific function. Its binary file occupies 5 slots on
the controller.
How to Access Application-Specific Functions
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 185 sur 249
To access the application-specific functions, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Install the software containing the desired application-specific functions in the installation directory of the
programming workshop.
2
Launch the programming workshop.
3
SelectMenu: Controller → List of application-specific functions → In the CLSM3 application...
Result: The List of available application-specific functions window appears.
4
Select the application-specific functions, which should appear in the FBD_C tab and confirm.
5
Open or create an application.
6
Click on the FBD_C button.
Result: The application-specific function bar appears. The desired function blocks can be inserted in the
wiring sheet (see Inserting Function Blocks).
Application-Specific Function Help
Each application-specific function has its own help. This help can be accessed by double-clicking on
the application-specific function in the wiring sheet then clicking on the Help button in the Settings
window.
Maximum Number of Slots
Each type of controller has a maximum number of slots that can be used by the application-specific
functions. In the controller bar a progress bar indicates the number of slots used by the application
compared to the maximum number of controller slots. To see the number of free slots, move the mouse
over the progress bar.
When the user places an FBD_C bar function block on the wiring sheet, there are two possible
scenarios:
If the application-specific function is already present in the application, the number of slots used
does not increase.
Otherwise the number of slots used is increased by the number of slots occupied by the applicationspecific function binary file.
Example: The PID Analog application-specific function binary file occupies 5 slots and that of the
BOOLEAN application-specific function occupies 1. If an application contains 5 PID Analog function
blocks and 10 BOOLEAN function blocks, it uses 6 slots.
List of Available Application-Specific Functions Window
The list of application-specific functions installed is accessible via Menu: Controller → Display the list
of available application-specific functions.
The information displayed is described below.
Function name: This is the name that appears in the function help balloon
Gen num: Generation order of the function (unique number identifying the function)
Version: Version of the function. The version of the controller software with which the function is
compatible is indicated in brackets
Loadable binaries:
If YES, the application-specific function can be used on a compatible controller.
If NO, the function can be used to construct programs and simulate them but not to write them in
the controller.
The Add button is used to add a function to the FBD_C function bar.
The Delete button is used to delete a function from the FBD_C function bar.
Writing to the Controller
The sequence of writing an application using application-specific functions (Menu: Controller →
Writing to the controller) is as follows:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 186 sur 249
How to See the Controller Application-Specific Functions
To have the list of controller application-specific functions select Menu: Controller → List of
application-specific functions → In the controller...
Manipulating FBD Objects
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
This section describes the manner in which objects in the wiring and supervision sheets should be
manipulated: how to select, move, duplicate or delete objects, etc.
What's in this Section?
This section contains the following topics:
How to Select Objects
How to Create Composite Objects
How to Delete and Duplicate Objects
How to Position Objects
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 187 sur 249
How to Create or Modify a MACRO
How to Select Objects
Overview
In a wiring or supervision sheet, function blocks, MACROS and drawings are objects.
When objects are created, it is sometimes necessary to select certain ones in order to position or group
them, etc. The selection or deselection of objects is therefore a basic operation when creating an FBD
program.
How to Select One or More Objects
The table below describes the operations to carry out in order to select one or more objects.
If you would like to select...
Then
an isolated object.
Left-click on the object.
Several contiguous objects.
Frame the objects to be selected by defining a selection zone.
Result: All the selected objects are highlighted by small colored squares
located at each corner of the block.
Several objects scattered about in the wiring
sheet.
Press the Shift key, then click on the objects to be selected while continuing to
hold down the Shift key.
Result: All the selected objects are highlighted by small colored squares
located at each corner of the block.
How to Deselect a Block of Selected Objects
The table below describes the operations to carry out in order to deselect a block.
Step
Action
1
Press the Shift key and keep the key pressed down.
2
Left-click the selected block that you wish to deselect.
Result: The colored squares associated with the object disappear, showing that the block is no longer
included in the selection.
How to Create Composite Objects
Overview
The objects in a wiring or supervision sheet are sometimes associated to form a single composite
object. In the same way, it is sometimes necessary to ungroup a composite object into several single
objects, in order to manipulate them individually.
How to Associate a Group of Objects
The table below describes the operations to carry out in order to associate a group of objects.
Step
Action
1
Select the objects to associate.
Result: The selection is represented by small colored squares located on each element of the selection.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
2
Page 188 sur 249
Activate the Group command in the Tools menu.
Result: The objects are grouped into a single composite object. The resulting object is represented by small
colored squares located at each corner of the object.
How to Ungroup a Group of Objects
The table below describes the operations to carry out in order to ungroup a group of objects.
Step
Action
1
Select the composite object to ungroup.
Result: The composite object is represented by small colored squares.
2
Activate the Ungroup command in the Tools menu.
Result: All the objects contained in the composite object are displayed with their small colored squares.
How to Delete and Duplicate Objects
Overview
Sometimes it may be necessary to delete an object or duplicate a given object in the wiring sheet.
How to Delete Objects
The table below describes the operations to carry out in order to delete one or more objects.
Step
Action
1
Select the object(s) to be deleted.
Result: The selection is represented by small colored squares located on each corner of the block.
2
Press the Delete or Backspace key.
Result: The selected objects are deleted.
How to Copy Objects Using the Mouse
The table below describes the operations to be carried out in order to copy one or more objects using
the mouse.
Step
Action
1
Select the object(s) to be copied.
2
Left click on one of the selected objects.
3
Keep the mouse button pressed down and press the CTRL key.
4
Drag the selected object(s) to the chosen spot.
Result: During the movement, the selection is shown by a dotted zone.
5
Release the mouse button.
Result: The copy of the selection is positioned at the chosen spot.
How to Cut, Copy or Paste Objects
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 189 sur 249
The table below shows the operations to carry out to cut, copy or paste one or more objects.
Step
Action
1
Select the object(s) to be manipulated.
Result: The selection is represented by small colored squares located on each corner of the block.
2
Select the command to execute:
Edit → Cut
Edit → Copy
Edit → Paste
Result: Cut deletes the selected objects and stores them on the clipboard. Copy duplicates the selected
objects onto the clipboard and Paste duplicates the clipboard contents onto the screen.
Note: The keyboard shortcuts Ctrl C, Ctrl V and Ctrl X can also be used respectively to copy the
selected function blocks, and either paste or delete them.
How to Position Objects
At a Glance
It is sometimes necessary in a wiring or supervision sheet to position an object in relation to another.
To align objects,
To center objects,
To position the objects in the foreground and background in relation to others.
How to Align a Group of Objects
The following table describes the operations to carry out when aligning a group of objects:
Step
Action
1
Select the objects to align.
Result: All of the selected objects are highlighted by small colored squares placed at each corner of the
block.
2
From the Align command in the Tools menu, select:
Align left,
Align right,
Align top,
Align bottom.
Result: The selected objects are aligned according to the choice made.
How to Center a Group of Objects
The following table describes the operations to carry out when centering a group of objects:
Step
Action
1
Select the objects to center.
Result: All of the selected objects are highlighted by small colored squares placed at each corner of the
block.
2
From the Align command in the Tools menu, select:
Center vertically,
Center horizontally.
Result: The selected group of objects is centered.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 190 sur 249
How to Bring an Object to the Foreground
The following table describes the operations to carry out when bringing an object to the foreground:
Step
Action
1
Select the object to be brought to the foreground.
Result: The selected object is highlighted by small colored squares placed at each corner of the block.
2
From the Order command in the Tools menu, select Bring to front.
Result: The object selected is brought to the foreground.
How to Send an Object to the Background
The following table describes the operations to carry out when sending an object in the background:
Step
Action
1
Select the object to be sent to the background.
Result: The selected object is highlighted by small colored squares placed at each corner of the block.
2
From the Order command in the Tools menu, select Send to back.
Result: The object selected is sent to the background.
How to Create or Modify a MACRO
What is a MACRO?
A MACRO is a group of function blocks. It is characterized by its number, its name, its links, its internal
function blocks (255 maximum) and its input/output connections.
Inside the MACRO:
The input connections are each connected to one function block input maximum
Each function block output can be connected to a function block input or to an output connection.
Seen from outside, a MACRO behaves like a function block with inputs and/or outputs likely to be
connected to links. However, a MACRO cannot be inserted in another MACRO.
Example:
Internal view of a MACRO:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 191 sur 249
1 Input connections (each connected to one function block input maximum)
2 Output connections
External view of the same MACRO in the edit window:
1 Inputs (only the effective input connections are shown)
2 Output (only the effective output is shown)
Maximum Number of MACROS
The maximum number of MACROS (including instances arising from a duplication) is 64.
Saving a MACRO
A MACRO is saved by saving the application in which it is found (see Saving an Application).
How to Create a MACRO
A MACRO is created in several steps:
Step
Action
1
Select the function blocks on the wiring sheet that you wish to appear in the MACRO.
Example:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
2
Select the Create a MACRO command from the pop-up menu.
3
Fill in the Macro Properties dialog box (the only compulsory field is MACRO identifier).
4
Page 192 sur 249
Close the dialog box by clicking on OK.
Result: All function blocks selected in step 1 are then shown by a single block (that of the MACRO) in the edit
window.
Example:
Manipulating a MACRO
Once created, a MACRO can be manipulated like a function block and in particular it can be:
Selected
Associated with other objects
Duplicated in the Edit window
Duplicated from an Edit window for import
Copied/cut between two Software Workshops
Deleted
Instances of a MACRO
A macro created by duplication is deemed to be a new instance of the original macro.
Modifications made to the graphic or properties of an instance are automatically made on other
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 193 sur 249
instances of the macro. They are equivalent to recompiling the macro. On the other hand, modifications
to the comment or internal function block parameters are specific to each instance of the macro. One
may thus find two instances of the same macro that have different parameters.
If the last instance of a macro is cut or deleted, a message warns the user. It is then possible to cancel
the operation.
The MACRO Properties Dialog Box
The MACRO Properties dialog box is used to enter or modify the properties of a MACRO. If the
MACRO has been duplicated, the modifications will affect all instances of the MACRO.
The dialog box is accessible when a MACRO is created or in the pop-up menu by selecting Display
macro then the Modify properties button.
The MACRO parameters are as follows:
MACRO identifier (1 to 5 characters)
Name of the MACRO (optional)
Symbol for the block, i.e. the appearance of the block that represents the MACRO in the main
wiring sheet, and may be any of the following:
Standard image (The MACRO identifier is then used as the block symbol), or
Custom image (To insert a custom image, click on the ... button)
Name of inputs (if necessary, modify the input label in the Label box of the table)
Name of outputs (if necessary, modify the output label in the Label box of the table)
The MACRO Window
MACROS can be modified in the MACRO window accessible from the Windows menu (except when
protected by a password. See Password Protection).
Note: To return to the edit window from the MACRO window, click on the
button.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 194 sur 249
The table below lists the different elements in the MACRO window.
Element
Function
1: Drop-down list
Select the MACRO from the list of all the project MACROS and, if applicable, from
the different instances.
2: Modify properties button
Access the MACRO Properties dialog box.
3: Function block internal to the MACRO Access the internal function block parameters by double-clicking on them.
(If the MACRO has been duplicated, the parameter modifications will only affect the
current instance of the MACRO).
4: MACRO wiring sheet
Modify the graphic of the MACRO and in particular:
Add or delete a link between two function blocks
Add a function block from the function bar or from the edit window
Delete a function block
(If the MACRO has been duplicated, these modifications will affect all instances of
the MACRO).
It is not possible to connect two input connections to the same function block input
(see Design Tip).
5: Input not connected
Create a new link to the input of a function block on the wiring sheet. An additional
input of the MACRO will then appear in the edit window. (If the MACRO has been
duplicated, these modifications will affect all instances of the MACRO).
6: Output not connected
Create a new link from the output of a function block on the wiring sheet. An
additional output of the MACRO will then appear in the edit window. (If the MACRO
has been duplicated, these modifications will affect all instances of the MACRO).
Design Tip
Inside a Macro, it is not possible to connect two input connections to two inputs on different function
blocks.
Instead, the following is advised, outside the MACRO, as shown in the diagram below:
How to Modify the Graphic of an Instance of a MACRO While Retaining Other Instances
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 195 sur 249
Modifying the graphic of a single MACRO instance essentially means creating a new MACRO. Follow
the steps below:
Step
Action
1
Select the MACRO instance by right-clicking the mouse.
2
Select Display MACRO in the pop-up menu.
3
Select Menu: Edit → Select all.
4
Select Menu: Edit → Copy.
5
Click on the
button to return to the main wiring sheet.
6
Select Menu: Edit → Paste.
7
Reposition the selection if necessary.
8
Select Create a MACRO in the pop-up menu.
9
Fill in the MACRO Properties dialog box (the only compulsory field is MACRO identifier).
10
Close the dialog box by clicking on OK.
11
Select Display MACRO in the pop-up menu.
12
Use the MACRO window to create the I/O connections and make modifications.
How to Modify a MACRO Comment
To modify a MACRO comment, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Double-click on the MACRO
2
Modify the comment.
3
Confirm by clicking on OK.
Password Protection
A password may if necessary be used to protect the MACROS of a project. It is independent of the
application password. It is a 4-digit number (0000 is not a valid password).
This protection is defined in the program configuration window accessible via the PROGRAM button or
via Menu: File → Properties, Configuration tab.
The same password protects all project MACROS. It is requested when the project is opened.
If the password is not entered when the project is opened the following functions are not available:
Access to the MACRO window
Copy a MACRO
Print MACROS
Debugging / Monitoring an FBD Application in the Programming
Workshop
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
This section describes the different functions linked to debugging the application in the programming
workshop in FBD mode.
What's in this Section?
This section contains the following topics:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 196 sur 249
Simulation Mode
Monitoring Mode
Modification and Forcing in Simulation and Monitoring Mode
Simulation Mode
Introduction
Before loading a program onto a controller, it is possible to simulate execution using the programming
workshop.
Access and Control
See: How to Debug an Application Without Loading it onto the Controller: Simulation.
Modification and Forcing
See: Modification and Forcing in Simulation and Monitoring Mode.
Monitoring Mode
Overview
In monitoring mode, the controller is linked to the software workshop's host computer. In this mode you
can perform the following actions from the edit and supervision windows and from the front panel:
View the states of function block outputs
View and modify function block parameters
Force the state of function block inputs and outputs (maximum of 10 function block outputs
simultaneously)
Modify the state of the buttons on the front panel
Force the state of function block links
Monitoring mode can be accessed from the Mode:Monitoring menu.
In monitoring mode, the different windows are all updated on each cycle. For example, if a function
block is placed in the edit and supervision window, when any action is performed on this function block
from the edit window, it is also updated in the supervision window.
(See Monitoring and Modifying an Application Running on the Controller from the Programming
Workshop: Monitoring)
Unavailable Functions
In monitoring mode, the following functions are not available:
Graphic editing of programs
Transfer program
Delete program
Compare program
Switch to Simulation mode
Modify communication parameters
Access to Monitoring Mode
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Monitoring is accessed by the Mode:Monitoring menu or by using the
Page 197 sur 249
icon.
The following scenarios may arise:
An application is open in the programming workshop: the version on the controller is compared with
that of the programming workshop:
If the programming workshop application is the same as the application on the controller,
monitoring mode is started.
If the programming workshop application is different from the application on the controller, the
versions must be synchronized by transferring the PC program to the controller or the controller
program to the PC.
No application is open in the programming workshop: in this case, the programming workshop offers
to send the application currently being executed on the controller back to the PC.
Once the transfer is complete, the supervision screen is displayed.
Diagram
The program states in the application windows are represented the same way as those in Simulation
mode.
The figure below shows an example of edit and supervision windows in simulation mode:
Modification and Forcing in Simulation and Monitoring Mode
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 198 sur 249
Overview
In simulation or monitoring mode, you can modify the parameters of function blocks and inputs, and
force link states.
Forced values are highlighted by a change in color according to the state.
How to Modify the Parameters of a Function
During simulation or monitoring, it is possible to modify the parameters of a function in the Edit window
or in the window of a MACRO.
Step
Action
1
Double-click on the symbol representing the function. (This operation can be performed in the edit window,
in the function summary table or in the supervision window.)
Result: The function parameter window opens.
2
Modify one or more function parameters.
3
Click on OK.
How to Modify or Force Discrete Inputs
During simulation or monitoring, it is possible to modify or force discrete inputs by clicking on them with
the mouse. Each click reverses the state of the input.
In monitoring mode, this action corresponds to forcing. It is maintained until the moment of release.
How to Modify or Force Analog Inputs
During simulation or monitoring, it is possible to modify or force analog inputs.
Mode
Procedure(s)
Result
Simulation
Method 1:
Click on the input with the mouse.
The simulated input value is
modified until the moment of
release.
Modify the value in the Analog Value window.
The simulated input value is
modified.
Method 2:
If the input has already been modified, release forcing
Click on the
button.
Result: A potentiometer graduated between 0 and 10 V
appears for each analog
input.
Click on the cursor and move it while holding down the left
mouse button.
Monitoring
The input value is forced until the
moment of release.
Click on the input with the mouse.
Modify the value in the Analog Value window.
How to Force a Discrete Link
During simulation or monitoring, it is possible to force a discrete link in the Edit window or a discrete link
between two objects in the window of a MACRO.
To force a discrete link...
proceed as follows:
Result:
Momentarily...
Click on the link.
The state of the link is momentarily reversed.
Permanently...
Click on the link with the right mouse
button.
Click on Force and maintain.
The link remains in the chosen state until the
moment of release.
Choose the state into which the link should
be forced.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 199 sur 249
How to Force an Analog Link
During simulation or monitoring, it is possible to force an analog link in the Edit window or an analog
link between two objects in the window of a MACRO.
To force an analog link...
Momentarily...
proceed as follows:
Click on the link.
Enter the value to which the link should be
forced.
Permanently...
Click on the link with the right mouse
button.
Click on Force and maintain.
Result:
The link remains at the chosen value until a
system or user action causes its modification.
The link remains in the chosen state until the
moment of release.
Enter the value to which the link should be
forced.
Forcing a Link in a MACRO
During simulation or monitoring, it is possible to force a link in the window of a MACRO on condition
that it is a link between two MACRO function blocks or from a function block to an output. It is not
possible to force a link connected to a MACRO input.
To open the MACRO window, right-click on the MACRO then select Display MACRO in the pop-up
menu.
See, according to the type of link:
How to Force a Discrete Link
How to Force an Analog Link
How to Release Forcing
The forced links(s) and forced inputs can be released in the following manner.
To release...
a link or an input ...
proceed as follows:
Click on the link or input with the right mouse button.
Click on Release.
all forced links and forced inputs ...
Click on the wiring sheet with the right mouse button.
Click on Release all.
Example of an FBD Application
Description
This example describes how a greenhouse's window panes can be managed automatically.
Specifications
The owner of a greenhouse would like to acquire an installation to manage the opening and closing of
the ventilation window panes located on the greenhouse roof.
The greenhouse has two window panes to provide ventilation. The opening of these window panes is
controlled by a motor and 2 sensors that indicate whether the window panes are open or closed:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 200 sur 249
During the day, the window panes open to ventilate the structure from 12:00 to 15:00, at the time of day
when, in principle, the temperature is the highest. However, if the temperature is less than 10ºC, the
window panes do not open, or when they are already open, they close.
In addition, the window panes open during the day when the temperature reaches 25ºC. If the
temperature falls below 25 ºC, the window panes must close again.
Finally, at night, the window panes remain closed regardless of the temperature.
Program description, 3 time ranges are used:
Range 1: Night, from 21:00 to 07:00
Range 2: Day, from 07:00 to 12:00 and from 15:00 to 21:00
Range 3: Noon, from 12:00 to 15:00
Summary:
Input/Output Table
Description of the inputs:
Input
Description
I1
Window panes open (Discrete)
I2
Window panes closed (Discrete)
IB
Temperature (analog)
Description of the outputs:
Input
Description
Q1
Opening of the window panes (Discrete)
Q2
Closing of the window panes (Discrete)
The temperature is supplied by a sensor with output voltage of 0 to 10 V.
Model Required
For this application, a controller with a clock and analog inputs is required:
CD12,
CB12,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 201 sur 249
CD20,
CB20,
XD10,
XD26.
FBD wiring sheet
Description:
Description of the Parameters
Analog comparator B12
Value1 > Value2
Analog comparator B18
Value1 > Value2
Daily programmer B11
Cycle in progress: 00
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 202 sur 249
Hour: 15,
Minute: 00,
OFF is selected,
All the other parameters are the same as for ON.
Daily programmer B13
Cycle in progress 00
Hour: 07,
Minute: 00,
ON is selected,
All the other parameters are the same as for programmer B11.
Cycle in progress 01
Hour: 12,
Minute: 00,
OFF is selected,
All the other parameters are the same as for programmer B11.
Cycle in progress 02
Hour: 15,
Minute: 00,
ON is selected,
All the other parameters are the same as for programmer B11.
Cycle in progress 03
Hour: 21,
Minute: 00,
OFF is selected,
All the other parameters are the same as for programmer B11.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 203 sur 249
Daily programmer B19
Cycle in progress 00
Hour: 21,
Minute: 00,
ON is selected,
All the other parameters are the same as for programmer B11.
Cycle in progress 01
Hour: 7,
Minute: 00,
OFF is selected,
All the other parameters are the same as for programmer B11.
Boolean functions
Controller Connections
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
This section describes the functions and parameters related to connection to the controller.
What's in this Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Connection with the Programming Workshop
Modbus Extension Communication
Communication Via Ethernet Extension
M3MOD Communication Interface
XAO4 24VDC Analog Inputs-Outputs Extension
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 204 sur 249
Connection with the Programming Workshop
At a Glance
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the different functions related to the connection of the controller to the
programming workshop.
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Configuring Communication Between the Programming Workshop and the Controller
Transferring the Program from the PC to the Controller
Read in the Controller
ON/OFF Program Run Commands
Compare the Controller Data with the Program
Controller Diagnostics
Protection of the Program Saved on the Controller
Clear the Program Contained in the Controller
Read/Write date and time
Configuring the Controller Language
Update the Controller Software
Configuring Communication Between the Programming
Workshop and the Controller
Description
To establish communication between the programming workshop and the controller, one of the
following links can be used:
Serial link: Com port
Bluetooth link: Com port
USB link
Modem link (only for controllers to which the M3MOD communication interface has been added)
Prior Action
Before launching the connection between the programming workshop and the controller, check the
following elements:
If using ...
a serial or USB link
ensure that:
The controller is physically connected to the programming software (PC).
The connection is correctly configured.
a Bluetooth link
The Bluetooth adapter and its driver have been installed.
Note: The driver assigns a com port to the adapter.
Access
The Configuring the connection... function can be accessed from the menu:Controller → Configure
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 205 sur 249
→ Connection.
Configuring Communication
Procedure for configuring communication:
Step
Action
1
Open the Configuring the connection window from the menu: Controller → Configure → Connection.
2
Choose the type of link:
Modem:
Specify:
The PC modem to be used for communication
The name of the remote station to which the programming workshop should connect
Com Port:
Specify the port to be used:
COM1
COM2
USB
Note: In the following cases it may be necessary to type "COMx" (where x> 2) in the window:
Using a laptop with USB
Using a USB-SERIAL converter (Win XP allocates a COM6 or COM8 for this new peripheral)
Using a Bluetooth link (specify which com port the adapter driver has assigned to the adapter)
3
Confirm your changes by pressing the OK key.
Test the Connection
It is possible to test the connection parameters at the Configuring connection window level using the
Test button.
In this case, the programming workshop attempts to connect to the controller using the current
parameters. If the connection configuration is not correct, an error message indicates that the device is
not responding.
Transferring the Program from the PC to the Controller
Description
The Write to the controller function translates the program into data that can be loaded into the
controller and transfers it from the PC to the controller.
This command opens the window: Compilation results, if the result of the compilation is:
Compilation successful, then the application is transferred to the controller,
Failed, the error number appears, the program must be edited, the error corrected and the write
command launched again.
The transfer is only possible if the controller:
Is not blocked by having sent an incorrect password,
Is stopped.
The program will be written on the controller only in the following cases:
The controller does not contain a program,
The controller contains a program that is not read/write protected with a password,
The controller contains a program that is read/write protected with a password, and the password is
known.
(In this case, the Password dialog box appears).
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 206 sur 249
If all conditions are met, the Write options dialog box appears.
Note: Only an FBD program that has been compiled without any error will be written to the controller.
All compiled LD programs will be written to the controller.
Note: The type of controller declared in the program must be compatible with the controller
connected:
Hardware version of the controller,
Software version of the controller,
Controller software build number less than or equal to that of the controller,
Same extension,
Same hardware version and same extension software version.
Note: The controller software is implicitly updated when a program is transferred to a controller
containing different software.
The controller software update is only allowed when the software loaded is designed for the same
controller:
Same hardware version,
Same boot version and build number less than or equal to the boot of the controller to be loaded.
Access
The Write to the controller function can be accessed from the Controller menu.
Controller default software
If a communication problem appears (3 attempts), then you can try loading the controller software with
the menu: Controller → Update the Controller Software
(Check that the serial line is not disturbed).
Procedure
Procedure for transferring the program to the controller:
Step
Action
1
Activate the menu Controller:Write to the controller.
Result: The program checking is launched and the Compilation results window opens.
2
Depending on the results of the check:
Compilation successful: Confirm with the OK key.
Result: The Write Options dialog box appears.
Failed: Correct the errors and then start again at step 1.
3
Select Write Options:
Protection of the program saved on the controller: Protect reading and modification of the program with a
password.
Save modifications before writing,
Start the monitoring mode and switch on the controller.
4
Confirm your changes by pressing the OK key.
Result: The Write Options dialog box disappears.
5
Start the transfer by pressing on the OK key.
Note: When using the M3MOD communication interface, in order for the link between the smart
module and the modem to work, you must:
Restart the communication interface after each change of link type (link with the PC, link with the
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 207 sur 249
modem),
Wait for the end of the initialization cycle of the communication interface.
Read in the Controller
Description
The Read in controller function translates the data contained in the controller in order to restore a
program that can be edited in the programming workshop.
The programming workshop will be able to read the contents only if the controller:
Contains a program that is not read/write protected with a password, or,
Contains a program that is read/write protected with a password, and the password is known.
(In this case, the Password dialog box appears).
The data retrieved by reading contains references to the application during its transfer:
The name of the application file,
The access path: relative to the File:Preferences... work directory.
Note: The access path is limited to a maximum of 128 characters (program name with extension
included).
If this limit is exceeded (only the file name and its extension are saved), then a window is displayed
to prompt the user to complete the access path.
Access
The Read in the controller function can be accessed from the Controller menu.
Restoring the Program
Using the information concerning the application present on the controller (name of the source file and
location on the PC), the workshop tries to reload the application file from the PC.
The aim of this search is to retrieve the graphic representations:
Positions related to the function blocks,
Positions of links between functions,
Comments,
Screen backgrounds,
Drawings.
Note: Modifications may have been made after the write from the application to the controller if:
At the level of the programming workshop: the application has changed,
At the controller level: modification of the parameters using the front panel.
In the case where differences in parameters appear, the dialog box asks the user if s/he would like to
update the programming workshop program with the parameters read in the controller.
There are certain cases where the program cannot be retrieved:
Program differences appear between the file containing the program on the PC and the application
read on the module,
The file containing the program on the PC is not accessible.
To reread the original application saved on the PC, use the path (128 characters) in the
configuration of the application loaded on the controller, then try an absolute path, then a path
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 208 sur 249
relative to the one defined as a preference. If only the name.ext can be found, look for the name in
the preferences directory, or ask the user to pinpoint the location of the file for you.
In these circumstances, the Program construction window opens and suggests an alternative
procedure:
Construction using the file specified by the user: the user manually enters the file path of the
application to be retrieved.
Automatic construction of the program: in this case, the programming workshop interprets the
data retrieved on the controller and rebuilds the corresponding application (the file is regenerated).
Note: The program loaded into the controller does not contain information concerning page setup
(drawing, comment, relative position of the function blocks and links); a default page setup is thus
produced.
Note: All of the function parameters are retrieved.
ON/OFF Program Run Commands
Description
These commands can be used to remotely control a controller connected to the PC. Once the
connection has been made, control can be carried out using the front panel window, with which the
user can interact as if it were the actual front panel of the controller.
This function is used to start and stop the program in the controller:
Start controller and Reset saved parameters: all the current values (counters, timers, etc.) are
reset to zero before the start up of the program,
Start the controller without Reset: the actual values for which the Save on power break option
were activated are maintained,
Turn the controller off: the program no longer runs, the outputs are deactivated.
Access
The ON/OFF Program Run Commands can be accessed from the Controller menu.
Controller Status Upon Power Failure
In the event of a power failure, the program is immediately stopped, parameters of the type
initialization on power break or latching on power break are saved.
(See How the controller behaves in the event of power outage).
A break in the link between the workshop and the controller is indicated in the workshop by an error
message (if the workshop is in Monitoring mode, it switches to edit mode).
When power is restored, the controller itself executes an ON command, initializing only the non-saved
data.
Controller Status on Blocking Error
If the event of a controller blocking error (break or disruption in the link between the module and its
extensions), the controller places itself in OFF mode:
The cause of the blockage can be viewed on the front panel of the controller.
To restart the controller, having removed the reason for the blockage, simply use the Start controller
and Reset saved parameters command.
See What the error code displayed on the front panel of the controller means,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 209 sur 249
Compare the Controller Data with the Program
Description
This function tests the identity between the data contained in the controller and the data produced by
compiling the programming workshop's application.
If the controller's data is protected by a password, the user is prompted to enter it in the Password
window.
The comparison is carried out on the program (including parameters) contained:
In the controller
In the programming workshop edit window on the PC.
Access
The Compare the controller data with the program function can be accessed from the Transfer
menu.
Controller Diagnostics
Description
The diagnostics function allows you to view all characteristics of the controller to which the
programming workshop is connected.
The Controller diagnostics dialog window can only be accessed if the controller is connected to the PC.
The diagnostics window is made up of 2 tabs:
Hardware: characteristics of the controller (hardware and software),
Application: Characteristics of the application built into the controller (user program).
Access
The Controller diagnostics function can be accessed from the Controller menu.
Hardware
The hardware tab provides the following information:
The controller type and version/release of the hardware and software,
Numbers and types of controller inputs and outputs,
connected extension(s) and version(s)/release(s), only for the extendable controllers,
Controller status (On, Off, Blocked in Error, Warning),
Controller language,
Error code (No error, Binary fault, Communication fault, Target Error or Warning),
Note: The hardware-related information is always accessible, regardless of whether the program is
protected by a password.
Application
The application tab provides the following information:
The name of the program, its author, and version,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 210 sur 249
Memories used/maximum memories,
All of its configuration parameters: Basic cycle time, WATCHDOG action, Password
Note: The information relating to the application is only available if the controller contains a program
that is not password-protected or if the user knows the password.
Protection of the Program Saved on the Controller
Description
The option for protecting the program transferred to the controller can be activated at the end of the
Write to the controller procedure.
The protection is activated in the Write options dialog box that contains the parameter: Protect
reading and modification of the program with a password: if this option is validated, the password
data entry zones are activated.
Note: After 5 unsuccessful tries, the module is locked for a duration of 30 minutes.
Clear the Program Contained in the Controller
Description
The program's clear function can be used to erase the application loaded on the controller, as well as
related information (password), but does not affect the controller and its software.
This operation is very useful for removing a program whose password you have forgotten.
Note: The program clear command is still valid, even if the controller is protected by a password.
Access
The Clear the contents of the controller function can be accessed from the Controller menu.
Read/Write date and time
Description
The set clock window sets the date and time: It is divided into two zones:
Date zone,
Time zone.
Access
The Read/Write date and time function can be accessed from the Controller menu.
Settings:
The date is configure using the field in the Date zone.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 211 sur 249
The Time zone sets:
Hours,
Minutes,
Seconds
Controller clock drift: in seconds per week.
Procedure
Set clock procedure of the controller:
Step
Action
1
Click on menu :Controller → Read/Write date and time.
2
Enter the new clock parameters.
3
Confirm your changes by clicking Write to the controller.
Result: the workshop sends the new values to the controller.
Configuring the Controller Language
Description
This function is used to change the controller interface language.
All messages can be viewed in 5 languages:
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Access
The Controller language function is accessible from the menu: File → Preferences.
Procedure
Procedure for updating the controller language:
Step
Action
1
Select the menu: File → Preferences.
2
In the Controller language zone, select the language in the drop-down menu.
3
Confirm by clicking on OK.
4
Select the menu: Controller → Write to the controller.
5
In the Write Option window confirm by clicking on OK.
Result: The software workshop sends the new values to the controller.
Update the Controller Software
Description
This command can be used to load the software into the module:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 212 sur 249
Select the operating mode of the user program: FBD / LD mode, or else,
change the version/release.
This triggers clearing of the program that was loaded into the controller, as well as all of the controller's
configuration parameters.
This operation is also very useful for removing a program whose password you have forgotten.
Note: The software is implicitly updated when a program is transferred to a controller containing a
different software.
Access
The Update the controller software function can be accessed from the Controller menu.
Procedure
Procedure for updating the controller software:
Step
Action
1
Click on Menu: Controller → Update the controller software
2
Select the software to be downloaded using the Browse key.
3
Validate the transfer by pressing the Write to the controller key.
Result: The software workshop sends the new values to the controller.
What to do in the case of apparent failure of the controller?
A brief power failure during loading could make the controller seem to fail. In fact, in this case, the
controller will display nothing because its software has been lost. In this case, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Create a new power failure for 10 seconds.
2
Restart the procedure for updating the controller software.
Modbus Extension Communication
Description
The Modbus protocol is a master/slave protocol that allows one, and only one, master to request
responses from slaves, or to act based on the request.
To use Modbus functions, a Modbus XN03 extension must be added to a controller type XD10...,
XD10S..., XD26... or XD26S....
Modbus communication can be used:
in FBD mode
or in LD mode
Note: The Modbus extension only operates in Modbus slave mode.
Functional Description
The Modbus extension has the following features:
Connection on a Modbus network: 2 or 4-wire
Maximum network length: 1000 meters (9600 bauds)
Line terminated at both ends (Line terminators: 1mF, 10V, 12 ohms, 0.25 W in series)
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 213 sur 249
Polarized line (Pull Up/Down: 470 ohms/0.25W polarization resistor)
Use of a shielded cable
Male RJ45 connectors
COMMON signal connected directly to the protection ground and to a point on the bus
Parameter Setting
The Modbus properties of the extension can be configured in the software workshop from the menu:
File → Properties, Modbus extension tab.
Number of wires and format:
2-wire, RTU
4-wire, RTU
2-wire, ASCII
4-wire, ASCII
Speed in bauds
Transmission speed (bauds): 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 28800, 38400 and 57600.
Parity
None
Even
Odd
Modbus slave address:
Network address: 1 to 247
Default settings: 2-wire, RTU, even parity, address 1, 19200 bauds
Data Exchanged
The extension has 8 16-bit data exchange words, four clock words and one status word.
Data
The data exchanged is specific to the programming mode:
FBD
or LD
Clock
The Modbus extension allows the Modbus master to access (read or write) to the clock.
Every modification to one of the 4 clock words updates the controller clock.
Updating the controller time:
The possible values (to be converted into hexadecimal):
Seconds: 0 to 59
Minutes: 0 to 59
Hours: 0 to 23
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 214 sur 249
The day of the week is calculated automatically
Day of the month: 1 to 31
Month: 1 to 12
Year: 0 to 255 (2000 to 2255)
Century: 21 (not used)
Status
The status word can only be accessed by the Modbus master.
R controller status:
0 : The controller is OFF.
1 : The controller is ON.
M monitoring:
0 : The controller is not in MONITORING mode.
1 : The controller is in MONITORING mode
A alarm status:
0 : Alarm detection is not active.
1 : Alarm detection is active.
E error:
0 : No error activated.
1 : Error activated (blocking fault).
T Time Out:
0 : Time Out period observed.
1 : Time Out period exceeded.
The alarm code contains the code of the incident detected by the controller software.
Wiring
2-wire Modbus
Modbus slave
Modbus master
RJ45
Signal
Signal
1
RXD0
NC
2
RXD1
NC
3
NC
NC
4
TXD1
D1
5
TXD0
D0
6
NC
NC
7
NC
NC
8
COMMON
COMMON
Use of a shielded cable: 1 twisted pair for D1-D0 and a third wire (or 1 twisted pair) for COMMON).
4-wire Modbus
Modbus slave
Modbus master
RJ45
Signal
Signal
1
RXD0
TXD0
2
RXD1
TXD1
3
NC
NC
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 215 sur 249
4
TXD1
RXD1
5
TXD0
RXD0
6
NC
NC
7
NC
NC
8
COMMON
COMMON
Use of a shielded cable: 1 twisted pair for RXD1-RXD0, 1 twisted pair for TXD1-TXD0 and a fifth wire
(or 1 twisted pair) for COMMON).
Communication Via Ethernet Extension
At a Glance
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the functions and settings related to communication via the Ethernet Extension.
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Overview
Acquisition of IP Addresses
Communication on the Ethernet Network
Specific Requests to the TCP Diagnostics
Overview
Introduction
The XN05 24VDC Ethernet extension can be added to one or more controllers with the following
references:
XD10 24VDC
XD10S 24VDC
XD26 24VDC
XD26S 24VDC
Then, to use the Ethernet connection, choose the FBD programming mode.
This part presents the architecture and the protocols used.
Ethernet Network Architecture
The Ethernet extension is present as a server on the network.
Example of network architecture with an Ethernet extension:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 216 sur 249
Protocol Stack Architecture
Data is exchanged between a client and a server in different protocol layers in accordance with the
following diagram:
Ethernet Protocol
Ethernet is used to exchange data between several devices, known as hosts, connected to one another
via the network.
An Ethernet message contains, in particular:
The recipient’s address to enable the message to be acquired by the destination device.
The sender's address to enable a response to be sent to the sending device.
IP Protocol
IP protocol is used to connect networks together and to communicate between one network and
another using gateways.
In a heterogeneous network, the various devices that relay messages between the sending and
destination devices may be subject to a limit on the length of messages that they can transmit. IP
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 217 sur 249
(Internet Protocol) fragments the data to be exchanged between devices into datagrams in order to
ensure that they can be accepted by all devices.
TCP Protocol
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) controls the reliability and scheduling of the transmission.
TCP works in online mode, providing a virtual point-to-point connection between the communicating
devices.
TCP manages the flow of exchanged data. It is used to monitor the arrival of transmitted packets, and
then reassemble them for execution.
Note: The Modbus basic exchange service in the form of a server is accessible from the TCP port at
address 502.
Modbus TCP/IP Protocol
Modbus TCP/IP is based on a client/server model. Each Modbus server has an array of registers where
clients can read or write data.
Acquisition of IP Addresses
Introduction
The Ethernet extension only responds to messages that are sent to it. Above all else, the message
must know the IP address and it must be known to the gateway.
The chart below shows the general process of acquiring the extension IP address:
Two acquisition modes are available:
Static (with or without subnet mask)
Dynamic (only with a Bootp server)
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 218 sur 249
Irrespective of the acquisition mode, the Ethernet extension is likely, in certain situations, to change to
fallback mode and use the default IP address.
Static Acquisition Mode
In static acquisition mode:
The IP addresses of both the Ethernet extension and the gateway are derived from the configuration
in the programming workshop.
The addresses may, where appropriate, be masked by a subnet mask.
Duplicate IP addresses are not allowed on the network. If the Ethernet extension detects a duplicate,
it changes to fallback mode and makes a new attempt every 15 s.
Subnet Mask
A subnet mask is used to address several physical networks with a single network address.
The mask separates the subnet address from the host device address as follows:
The subnet address is obtained by keeping the bits of the IP address which correspond to the mask
positions containing 1 as they are, and replacing the others with 0.
Conversely, the subnet host device address is obtained by keeping the bits of the IP address which
correspond to the mask positions containing 0 as they are, and replacing the others with 1.
Example 1:
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
IP address
192(11000000)
1(00000001)
17(00010001)
11(00001011)
Subnet mask
255(11111111)
255(11111111)
0(00000000)
0(00000000)
Subnet address
192(11000000)
1(00000001)
0(00000000)
0(00000000)
Host device address
255(11111111)
255(11111111)
17(00010001)
11(00001011)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
IP address
192(11000000)
1(00000000)
17(00010001)
11(00001011)
Subnet mask
255(11111111)
255(11111111)
240(11110000)
0(00000000)
Subnet address
192(11000000)
1(00000000)
16(00010000)
0(00000000)
Host device address
255(11111111)
255(11111111)
241(11110001)
11(00001011)
Example 2:
Dynamic Acquisition Mode
In dynamic acquisition mode:
A BootP server must be present on the network.
The user configures the BootP server using the MAC address, which is written on the side of the
Ethernet extension.
When IP acquisition starts, the Bootp server enables the Ethernet extension to obtain its parameters
IP parameters from its MAC address and to be recognized by the gateway.
If the Ethernet extension does not obtain a valid IP address from the Bootp server or if it detects a
duplicate of the IP address on the network, then it changes to fallback mode and sends a Bootp
request to the server every 15 s.
Fallback Mode
The Ethernet extension changes to fallback mode if it does not obtain a valid IP address or if it detects
a duplicate of the IP address on the network. It then provides the FDR (Faulty Device Replacement)
service and behaves as follows:
Phase
Description
1
2
The Ethernet extension uses its own default IP address and checks that this address is unique on the
network (duplicate IP addresses are not allowed on the network).
If any duplicate is detected, then the default IP address is used.
If not, the IP address field is blank.
3
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 219 sur 249
Every 15 s
In static acquisition mode, the Ethernet extension uses the IP address from the configuration and checks
that this address is unique on the network:
If no duplicate is detected, it switches to normal operation.
Otherwise it repeats phases 1, 2 and 3.
In dynamic acquisition mode, the Ethernet extension sends a Bootp request to the server:
If it obtains a valid IP address, unique on the network, it switches to normal operation.
Otherwise it repeats phases 1, 2 and 3.
Default IPAddress
A default IP address comes from the MAC address of the Ethernet extension. It is made up of 4 bytes.
The first 2 bytes are 86 and 16. The last 2 are the last 2 bytes of the MAC address.
Example: MAC address = 00.80.F4.86.00.2B Default IP address = 86.16.0.43.
Note: A MAC address is always written in hexadecimal notation. An IP address is always written in
decimal notation. Remember to do the conversion!
Communication on the Ethernet Network
Overview
The Ethernet XN05 24VDC extension can be added to one or more controllers with the following
references:
XD10 24VDC
XD10S 24VDC
XD26 24VDC
XD26S 24VDC
Then, to use the Ethernet connection, choose the FBD programming mode.
The Ethernet extension exchanges Modbus messages as a server, using the set of TCP/IP protocols
and Ethernet technology (see Overview).
The Ethernet Extension
The Ethernet extension has an RJ45 female connector and two LEDs.
The states of each LED, and what they mean, are described below.
LK/ACT 10/100
Off: No Ethernetconnection
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 220 sur 249
Green light: 100 Mbps Ethernet connection
Green flashing light: Data exchange at 100 Mbps
Yellow light: 10 Mbps Ethernet connection
Yellow flashing light: Data exchange at 10 Mbps
STS
On continuously: Ethernet extension supplied with power and ready for communication
Quick flashing: Ethernet communication is being initialized
4 flashes: Duplicate of the IP address detected on the network
5 flashes: Getting IP address in progress (in normal operating mode or before switching to
fallback mode)
6 flashes: Getting IP address in progress after switching to fallback mode.
The MAC address is engraved on the side of the Ethernet extension.
Connections to the Ethernet Network
The Ethernet extension manages a maximum of four simultaneous TCP connections. Client
applications must be designed so that this limit will not be exceeded. If a request is made to open a fifth
connection, it will be automatically rejected by the Ethernet extension.
A connection is deemed to be inactive if no Modbus request has been received for a period called
"Time Out". The Ethernet extension closes all inactive connections which do not come from the
reserved address (it does not take account of TCP Keep alive messages). The Time Out period can be
configured, and its default value is 10 min. Once the maximum number of connections has been
reached, new connections are authorized when one of the existing connections has timed out.
Reserved Address
An address may be reserved for a client to which the Ethernet extension must constantly remain
connected. The connection between the Ethernet extension and the client with the Reserved Address
is not subject to a Time Out. This connection is included in the maximum number of four connections.
How to Set the Communication Parameters
To configure communication, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Select the menu:File → Properties and the Ethernet extension tab or click on the XN05 24VDC button.
2
Does the network have a BootP server (see Acquisition of IP Addresses)?
If yes, then select Dynamic address and go to step 6.
If not, then select Static address and go to step 3.
3
In the IP Address field, enter in decimal format the four bytes of the Ethernet extension’s IP address.
4
If the Ethernet extension and the gateway are part of a sub-network determined by a mask, then enter in the
Subnet Mask field, in decimal format, the four bytes of the subnet mask (see Subnet Mask).
Note: 0.0.0.0 indicates that there is no mask.
5
In the Gateway address field, enter in decimal format the four bytes of the Ethernet gateway IP address.
Note: The gateway is a subnetwork peripheral (also known as a router) which allows your network segment
to access other network segments on your company’s global network, the Internet or a remote Intranet.
When installing your new Ethernet extension on the existing network, consult your network administrator for
information about gateways.
6
If the Ethernet extension needs to be constantly connected to a client, enter the address of this client in the
Reserved Address field.
7
If necessary, modify the Time Out period, i.e. the time after which the Ethernet extension must close an
inactive connection with the gateway, if the connection does not come from a Reserved Address.
Note: Take into account the maximum of 4 connections.
8
Click on OK.
Data Exchanged With the Modbus Client
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 221 sur 249
The Ethernet extension can exchange 16 data words, 4 clock words and one status word with the
Modbus TCP/IP client.
Data
The data exchanged is as follows:
Eight 16-bit input words, each accessible by the application via blocks J1ETH to J8ETH and open to
client(s) in read and write modes (see Ethernet Inputs).
Eight 16-bit output words, each accessible by the application via blocks O1ETH to O8ETH and open
to client(s) in read mode only (see Ethernet Outputs).
Clock
The Ethernet extension is used by the client to access the controller clock in read or write mode.
Every modification to one of the 4 clock words updates the controller clock.
Updating the controller time:
The possible values (to be converted into hexadecimal):
Seconds: 0 to 59
Minutes: 0 to 59
Hours: 0 to 23
The day of the week is calculated automatically
Day of the month: 1 to 31
Month: 1 to 12
Year: 2 to 99 (2002 to 2099)
Century: 21 (not used)
Status
The status word can be accessed by the client in read mode only.
R module status:
0 : The controller is OFF
1 : The controller is ON
M monitoring:
0 : The controller is not in MONITORING mode
1 : The controller is in MONITORING mode
A alarm status:
0 : Alarm detection is not active
1 : Alarm detection is active
E error:
0 : No error activated
1 : Error activated (blocking fault).
T Time Out:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 222 sur 249
0 : Time Out period observed
1 : Time Out period exceeded
The alarm code contains the code of the incident detected by the controller software.
Modbus Identification
The Ethernet extension supports the Modbus Read Device Identification function, function code 43
MEI 14. This function can be used to identify a remote device and obtain information on its physical and
functional description.
On interrogation, the Ethernet extension provides the Basic Device Identification service by sending
the detailed response below (x and y being the current software version numbers for the Ethernet
extension):
Identifier
Description
Type
Content
0x00
Vendor name
ASCII string
Crouzet
0x01
Product code
ASCII string
88970270
0x02
Major and minor revision
ASCII string
Vx.y
Specific Requests to the TCP Diagnostics
Call Status
In call status, the frame of the TCP request received by the Ethernet extension is as follows:
Field
Size
Content
Function code
1 byte
0x08
Sub-function
2 bytes
0x0015
Data
2 bytes
0x0003
The Ethernet extension response frame is as follows:
Field
Size
Content
Function code
1 byte
0x08
Sub-function
2 bytes
0x0015
Operation statistics
2 bytes
0x0003
Function errors
20 bytes
0 (Not provided)
Reception statistics
4 bytes
Errors on the receiving frame
4 bytes
Receiving capacity overflow errors
8 bytes
0 (Not provided)
20 bytes
0 (Not provided)
4 bytes
Host IP address
Transmission statistics
Reset Status
In reset status, the frame of the TCP request received by the Ethernet extension is as follows:
Field
Size
Content
Function code
1 byte
0x08
Sub-function
2 bytes
0x0015
Data
2 bytes
0x0004
The Ethernet extension response frame is as follows:
Field
Size
Content
Function code
1 byte
0x08
Sub-function
2 bytes
0x0015
Data
2 bytes
0x0004
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 223 sur 249
M3MOD Communication Interface
At a Glance
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the programming software functions for the M3MOD communication interface.
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
M3MOD Menu
Directories Menu
Configuration of the M3MOD Communication Via Modem Interface
Sending an Email via SMS
Description of the Error Codes of the M3MOD Communication Interface
M3MOD Menu
Description
This menu groups the functions relating to the connection of the programming software to the M3MOD
communication interface.
These functions are the following:
DM3MOD diagnostics
Update the M3MOD software
Message ON,
Message OFF.
Note: To use these functions, the programming software must be connected to the communication
interface.
M3MOD Diagnostics
The M3MOD Diagnostics function is used to display all the characteristics of the communication
interface to which the programming software is connected. In particular, it is possible to check the
hardware and software versions. To do this, proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Click on themenu: M3MOD → M3MOD Diagnostics.
Reminder: To use this function, the programming software must be connected to the communication
interface
Note: After transferring the program, it is necessary to reinitialize the communication interface to
activate the modem link.
Update the M3MOD Software
The Update the M3MOD Software function is used to select and load the software in the
communication interface. To do this, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
1
Page 224 sur 249
Click on menu: M3MOD → Update the M3MOD Software
Reminder: To use this function, the programming software must be connected to the communication
interface
2
Click on the Yes button in confirmation request window to begin the transfer to the communication interface.
Message ON
The Message ON function is used to activate the Message blocks of the application. Once active, the
Message blocks send their alarm messages as soon as the associated condition for generation
becomes true.
To activate the Message blocks, proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Click on the menu: M3MOD → Message ON.
Reminder: To use this function, the programming software must be connected to the communication
interface
Note: By default, the message blocks are activated after the program is transferred.
Message OFF
The Message OFF function is used to deactivate the Message blocks of the application. Even if the
condition for generation of the alarm message of a Message block becomes true, the message will not
be sent.
This function is used, for example, to prevent alarm messages from being sent during debugging of an
application.
To deactivate the Message blocks, proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Click on the menu: M3MOD → Message OFF.
Reminder: To use this function, the programming software must be connected to the communication
interface
Directories Menu
Description
The Directories menu groups functions of the programming software that are used to create or modify
different directories necessary to use the M3MOD communication interface.
There are three types of directories:
The Directory of Remote Stations: Lists target controller and provides for each the telephone
numbers and configuration parameters for the associated modems,
The Directory of Program Recipients: Lists recipients usable in the program being written,
provides their telephone number or email address, and specifies the commands that they have the
right to execute,
The Recipients General Directory: Lists the recipients regularly used in programs, so they do not
have to be recreated for each new program.
Directory of Remote Stations
To create or modify the Directory of Remote Stations, proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Click on the menu: Directories → Directories of Remote Stations....
Result: The Directory of Remote Stations window appears and for each remote station shows the
following:
The name of the remote station,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 225 sur 249
The type of modem,
The DATA telephone number of the modem,
The PIN code (only for gsm modems),
The SMS server telephone number (required field),
The SMS Email number, used to send an SMS to an Email address (contact the telephone operator of
the SIM card to find out if this option is offered).
2
Click on the Create button to add a remote station to the directory.
Result: The following window appears:
Note: To modify an existing remote station, select it and click on the Modify button, then proceed exactly as
for a creation.
3
In the Identification zone enter the following:
The name of the remote station,
The DATA telephone number of the remote station.
Note : For GSM modems, to send an Email via SMS, the syntax to use in the remote station name is
specific to each telephone operator. Contact the telephone operator of the SIM card of the modem and refer
to the section Sending an Email via SMS for more information.
4
In the Modem zone, choose the modem used:
Auto: The system will automatically configure the modem detected between the MOD 88970118 and the
MOD 88970119,
MOD 88970118: Uses the parameters predefined for the RTC reference modem MOD 88970118,
MOD 88970119: Uses the parameters predefined for the GSM reference modem MOD 88970119,
Other: You must manually enter the name, the type of modem, its initialization frame (for more
information about the initialization frame, contact the manufacturer) and configure it using the following
parameters:
serial speed: 115,200 baud,
7 data bits, 1 stop bit, 1 parity bit,
even parity,
DSR always ON,
echo deactivated.
Note: Only one other modem can be created.
5
For the GSM modem only, fill in the following:
The SMS server telephone number (required field),
The SMS Email number,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 226 sur 249
The PIN code corresponding to the SIM card of the modem. If no PIN code is associated with the SIM
card, leave the field empty.
Note: The telephone number of the SMS server and the Email number by SMS are specific to each
telephone operator. Contact the telephone operator of the SIM card of this modem to obtain them.
6
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
7
Repeat steps 2 to 6 for each remote station to create or modify.
8
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
Directory of Program Recipients
To create or modify the Directory of Program Recipients, proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Click on the menu: Directories → Directories of Program Recipients.
Result: The Directory of Program Recipients window appears and for each remote station shows the
following:
The name of the recipient,
The telephone number or the email address,
The type of recipient,
The number of connection attempts in the event of message send failure (network loss, busy signal,
etc.) before the remote station attempts to contact the recipient following the list,
The recognition authorization (only for gsm mobiles),
The recognition delay: The delay (in minutes) given to the recipient to send back the acknowledgement,
The authorization to modify variables.
Note: For more information on sending variable modification commands, see the on-line help of the
Millenium 3 Alarm operating tool and the user help document of the operations folder.
2
Add Recipients:
Either by creating them: Click on the Create,
Or by importing them from the general directory: Confirm by clicking on the Gen. Dir. button, then:
Select the recipient in the Recipients general directory zone.
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
3
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
General Directory of Recipients
The Recipients general directory is independent of the program being edited. It can be used to save the
information of the recipients used regularly in the programs. To create or modify the Directory of
Program Recipients, proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Click on the menu: Directories → Recipients general directory.
Result: The Recipients general directory window appears and for each recipient shows the following:
The name of the recipient,
The telephone number or the Email address,
The number of connection attempts in the event of message send failure (network loss, busy signal,
etc.) before the remote station attempts to contact the recipient following the list,
The recognition authorization (only for gsm mobiles),
The recognition delay: The delay (in minutes) given to the recipient to send back the acknowledgement,
The authorization to modify variables.
Note: For more information on sending variable modification commands, see the on-line help of the
Millenium 3 Alarm operating tool and the user help document of the operations folder.
2
It is possible:
To Add Recipients: Click on the Create button,
To Modify a Recipient: Select the recipient then click on the Modify button,
To Delete a Recipient: Select the recipient then click on the Delete button,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 227 sur 249
To import recipients from a given program: Click on Import button, then:
Select the programming and confirm,
Select the recipient in the Imported Directory zone,
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
3
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
Creating a Recipient
When creating a new recipient, after clicking on the Create button (in the general directory or in the
directory of program recipients), proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Select the type of recipient from among:
Millenium 3 Alarm,
Mobile telephone,
Email.
2
Enter recipient name.
3
Enter its telephone number or its Email (use the international format for mobile telephones, for example:
+33670••••••)
Note : For GSM modems, to send an Email via SMS, the syntax to use in the recipient Email is specific to
each telephone operator. Contact the telephone operator of the SIM card of the modem and refer to the
section Sending an Email via SMS for more information.
4
Specify the number of connection attempts in the event of message send failure (network loss, busy signal,
etc.) before the remote station attempts to contact the recipient following the list,
5
You may also check the Variable modification authorized box (only for Millenium 3 Alarm and Mobile) to
let them modify certain variables associated with message blocks.
Note: When receiving a modification command, the communication interface identifies the recipient by its
telephone or modem number. The recipient should thus make sure that its number is not hidden when it
sends a command.
6
You may also check the Recognition Authorized box, to activate the acknowledge system for this recipient
(only for Mobile-type recipients).
In this case, specify the recognition delay (in minutes).
7
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
Configuration of the M3MOD Communication Via Modem
Interface
Description
Here are details on the parameters to enter for configuring the M3MOD communication interface.
Parameters
The M3MOD Extension tab of the Program Configuration window is used to configure the M3MOD
communication interface.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 228 sur 249
The configuration window is accessible using the menu: File → Properties..., or using the
button located above the edit window.
The parameters to enter for configuring the communication interface are the following:
The Maximum size of the remote station name, must be less than 30 characters long (default
value),
The Maximum Size of Email Address, must be less than 30 characters long (default value), this
determines the maximum length of recipient Email addresses or alarm messages,
The Directory of Program Recipients, this button is used to display and modify the directory, see
Directory of Program Recipients,
The list of recipients authorized to execute Control commands, this button is used to display and
modify this list, see Control Commands.
The messages on predefined conditions:
M3 Alarm: This button is used to define the alarm message sent when the controller software
detects an error, seeM3 Alarm,
M3MOD Alarm: This button is used to define the alarm message sent when the M3MOD
communication interface software detects an error, seeM3MOD Alarm.
Control Commands
Control commands are used to read/modify the controller configuration settings and to monitor its
status. To choose from among the program recipients the ones that have the right to execute control
commands, proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Click on the Control Commands button.
Result: The following window appears:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 229 sur 249
2
Select, in the Recipients Directory, the recipient to add in the list of the Recipients authorized to execute
control commands.
3
Click on the Add -> button.
4
Double click, in the Recipients authorized to execute control commands zone, on the recipient just added.
In the drop-down list choose:
No RUN/STOP: To authorize this recipient to execute control commands, except the RUN and STOP
commands,
All: To authorize this recipient to execute all control commands without exception.
Note: For more information on sending commands, see the on-line help of the Millenium 3 Alarm alarm
operations tool and the user help document of the operations folder.
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each recipient in the list of Recipients authorized to execute control commands.
Note: The list of Recipients authorized to execute control commands contains at most 10 recipients.
6
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
M3 Alarm
This button is used to define the alarm message sent when the controller software detects an error,
proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Click on the M3 Alarm button.
Result: The M3 Alarm window appears.
2
Click on the button
message.
of the Message Recipient zone to add a recipient or modify the list of recipients of this
Result: The following window
appears:
These recipients are chosen from the Directory of Program Recipients.
3
For each new recipient to be added, select it in the directory of the program and click on the Send to -> button.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 230 sur 249
4
Organize the recipients in the order of priority by using the + and - buttons.
5
Confirm by clicking on the OK button
6
In the Message to Transmit zone, enter:
The message object.
The message body.
Note: The total length of the message object and body should not exceed 160 characters.
Note: For GSM modems, to send an Email by SMS, the syntax to use in the subject and message body is
specific to each telephone operator. Contact the telephone operator of the SIM card of the modem and refer to
the section Sending an Email via SMS for more information.
7
If necessary, check the Display error code box to include the code of the error detected in the message body.
Notes:
It is possible to move this text: Select ERR=___ and drag and drop.
See Error Description, for more information on controller error codes.
8
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
M3MOD Alarm
To define the alarm message sent when the communication interface software detects an error,
proceed as follows:
Step
1
Action
Click on the M3MOD Alarm button.
Result: The M3MOD Alarm window appears.
2
Click on the button
message.
of the Message recipient zone to add a recipient or modify the list of recipients of this
Result: The following window
appears:
These recipients are chosen from the Directory of Program Recipients.
3
For each new recipient to be added, select it in the directory of the program and click on the Send to -> button.
4
Organize the recipients in the order of priority by using the + and - buttons.
5
Confirm by clicking on the OK button
6
In the Message to Transmit zone, enter:
The message object.
The message body.
Note: For GSM modems, to send an Email by SMS, the syntax to use in the subject and message body is
specific to each telephone operator. Contact the telephone operator of the SIM card of the modem and refer to
the section Sending an Email via SMS for more information.
7
If necessary, check the Display error code box to include the code of the error detected in the message body.
Notes:
It is possible to move this text: Select ERR=___ and drag and drop.
See Description of the Error Codes of the M3MOD Communication Interface, for more information on
controller error codes.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
8
Page 231 sur 249
Select the Condition for generating message of the alarm.
One (or more) boxes may be checked among the following:
Power returns after power failure,
M3 - M3MOD connection lost
All M3MOD errors (if this box is checked, the 2 preceding boxes are automatically checked).
9
Confirm by clicking on the OK button.
Order of Priority
When sending an alarm message, the M3MOD communication interface contacts the message
recipients one after another. The Choose Recipients window is used to define the order in which the
message recipients are contacted.
Depending on whether the Recognition option is activated or not, two types of recipients may be
defined:
Recipient without recognition: The alarm message is systematically sent, then the communication
interface processes the next recipient,
Recipient with recognition (for mobile-type recipients only): The communication interface sends
the alarm message and waits for acknowledgement of the recipient via its mobile telephone:
If the recipient with recognition acknowledges the message, the communication interface
continues the send sequence only to recipients without recognition,
If the recipient with recognition does not acknowledgement the message in the given time
(Recognition delay), the communication interface processes the next recipient.
For more information on activating the Recognition option, see Creating a Recipient.
Sending an Email via SMS
Description
Here is a description of the frame of an alarm message based on the parameters of the communication
interface and Message function blocks.
Message Structure
The structure of the frame of the SMS sent to the Email server via SMS of the operator of the SIM card
is described below.
<Email of recipient><Name of the remote station> <Date time> <Subject of alarm message><Body of
the alarm message>
In the frame below:
The characters < and > represent the delimitation of the different fields and are not present in the
frame sent,
The character represents a space character.
For example:
The remote station StationPompage1 sends an alarm message to the recipient whose Email is
Maintenance1@•••.com at 7:35 PM on January 9th, 2006. The subject of the alarm message is Alarm
levels max attained, the message body is Level=2.80 m.
The frame of the alarm message sent is thus:
Maintenance1@•••.comStationPompage1 06/01/09 19:35 Alarm levels max attainedLevel=2.80 m
Respect the Syntax Specific to the Operator
Be sure to respect the syntax specific to the SMS Email server of the operator of the SIM card of the
remote station. To do this, use the necessary characters in the affected fields (recipients directory,
remote stations directories, message function block, etc.).
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 232 sur 249
Description of the Error Codes of the M3MOD Communication
Interface
Description
Here we describe the errors detected by the software of the M3MOD communication interface.
Error Codes
List of errors:
Number
Type of error
05
Recipient problem
The type of recipient is incorrect. Modify the recipient.
Note: This fault is non-blocking.
42
Checksum application controller fault
The application in the controller is not correct. Transfer the application in the programming software to the
controller.
43
Power supply return
A power failure has been detected.
Note: This fault is non-blocking.
44
PIN Error Codes
2 incorrect PIN codes have been entered. Check the PIN code on the SIM card of the GSM modem
connected to the communication interface.
45
IS463 Unknown Status
An unknown operation was executed. Reload the software of the communication interface.
46
Program fault
The application in the controller is missing. Transfer the application in the programming software to the
controller.
47
IS498 Unknown status
An unknown operation was executed. Reload the software of the communication interface.
48
Modem missing
The modem cannot be detected. Check:
The link between the M3MOD communication interface and the modem,
Modem power supply.
49
Controller missing
The controller cannot be detected. Check:
The link between the M3MOD communication interface and the controller,
The controller status.
Note: This fault is non-blocking.
50
Binary fault
The software of the communication interface is damaged. Reload the software of the communication
interface.
51
Modem parameters incorrect
Check the modem configuration using the programming software. See Directory of Remote Stations.
58
Watchdog Fault
Internal watchdog overflow.
Note: This fault is non-blocking.
60
OFF Alarms
Alarm message send is disabled. See Ò
61
SIM erase error
A SIM card erase error has been detected. Check the SIM card.
XAO4 24VDC Analog Inputs-Outputs Extension
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 233 sur 249
Description
The XAO4 24VDC analog I/O extension allows the use of 2 additional analog inputs and 2 additional
analog outputs. These I/O are coded on 10 bits.
Programming Language
If an analog I/O extension was added during the choice of module/programming process, only the FBD
programming language is available.
The extension inputs are represented on the wiring sheet by the plots:
IP XA
IQ XA
The extension outputs are represented on the wiring sheet by the plots:
OF XA
OG XA
Parameter Setting
The properties of each of these 2 inputs and 2 outputs of the extension can be configured in the
programming workshop in the Analog extension tab of the Program Configuration window (directly
accessible by clicking on the XAOA 24VDC button).
In the IP input zone, choose:
0-20 mA: If the input connected to the IP A plot is a current input
0-10 V: If the input connected to the IP XA plot is a voltage input
In the IQ input zone, choose:
0-20 mA: If the input connected to the IQ XA plot is a current input
0-10 V: If the input connected to the IQ XA plot is a voltage input
PT100: If the sensor connected to the IQ XT2 plot is a PT100 resistance temperature detector.
In the OF output and OG output zones, specify:
The type of output, Analog or PWM (pulse width modulation)
According to type chosen:
Analog: The acceleration time of each OF XA and OG XA output respectively, according to the
dynamic of the system it controls (the acceleration time is the time taken by the output to go from
0 V to 10 V or from 10 V to 0 V)
PWM: The frequency of OF XA and OG XA outputs (78 Hz, 312.5 Hz, 666.6 Hz, 1000 Hz,
1250 Hz, 1428 Hz, 1666 Hz or 2000 Hz)
4-20mA Type Sensor
It is possible to use a 4-20mA type sensor.
In this case:
During parameter setting, select 0-20 mA
Put a gain function after the input to make a conversion and limit the operating range
Example: To convert the 4-20 mA input to an integer value between 0 and 4092, use a gain function
with the following parameters:
A=5
B=1
C = -1023
Lower limit = -1023
Upper limit = 4092
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 234 sur 249
In this example, a value less than zero at the gain function output means that the link between the
sensor and the controller is faulty.
Delay in Availability of Measurements
The availability of analog input measurements is delayed by a few ms in the following situations:
Power return following a power cut
Variation between 0 and full scale
Functions of the Programming Workshop
At a Glance
Subject of this Section
This section describes the different functions available in the programming workshop.
What's in this Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Functions
Description of Menus
Functions
At a Glance
Subject of this Chapter
This chapter describes the different functions available in the programming workshop.
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Program Configuration
Preferences of the Programming Workshop
Program Check
Write Options Window
Import
Conversion of Older Applications
Setting the Clock
Saving an Application
Printing the Program
Page Header and Footer for Application Printing
Error Description
Splitting the Wiring Sheet
Program Configuration
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 235 sur 249
Description
The program configuration window is used to set the different parameters linked to the application.
The window includes at least the following four tabs:
Properties
Configuration
History
Date format
When some extensions are added to the controller, they cause other, specific parameter tabs to
appear:
MODBUS extension
ETHERNET extension
Analog extension
M3MOD extension
Access
The Program configuration function is accessible from the PROGRAM icon.
Properties
The Properties tab is used to define the following elements:
Project name (maximum 24 characters)
Author (maximum 32 characters)
Version
Comment (maximum 9 lines)
Note: When printing the comment, only line feeds introduced by the user with the Enter key are
taken into account.
Configuration
The Configuration tab is used to set the following parameters:
Adjustment of the controller basic cycle time
WATCHDOG action (control of the controller basic cycle time)
Frequency of all controller PWMs, only for controllers with PWM-type outputs
Restricted access to the Parameters menu of the controller front panel
Activate MACRO password protection
History
The History tab is used to track changes in the application.
The programmer can save the following information for each change:
Date
Programmer name
Version
Comment
Date Format
The Date format tab is used to set:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 236 sur 249
The format in which the date will be displayed, to be chosen from the following three options:
Day/Month/Year
Month/Day/Year
Year/Month/Day
Automatic summer/winter time change.
Here you can activate or deactivate automatic time change, and choose the changeover dates. (See
How to Activate Automatic Time Change)
Basic Cycle
To be executed by the controller, this program is translated as a set of ordered instructions, where each
instruction corresponds to a function.
This set of instructions (functions) is executed periodically, therefore at regular time intervals. This time
interval is called the basic cycle time.
This time therefore corresponds to the sampling period of analog data read as inputs of the controller
and its extensions and to the refresh period of the outputs of the controller and its extensions.
This time can be set from 6 ms to 90 ms in 2 ms steps.
Make sure that:
Input variations that are too rapid are not masked by a cycle time that is too slow
The speed of output variation is compatible with system commands
Note: For discrete and analog filtered inputs, the filtering duration and cut-off frequency are
recalculated when the corresponding parameter setting window is opened: The user must therefore
check whether the new values of these parameters are compatible with the variation speed of the
input signals.
To set the basic cycle time, click on the PROGRAM icon.
(See also How to Debug an Application without Loading it onto the Controller: Simulation
WATCHDOG
The WATCHDOG monitors the application cycle time added to the duration of processing specific to
the operation of the controller and any extensions. An overflow occurs if this time exceeds the basic
cycle time.
In the case of overflow, the different actions of the WATCHDOG are as follows:
INACTIVE: normal operating mode
ALARM: A warning state is set and the warning number corresponding to Cycle overflow is
accessible in the FAULT menu
ERROR: The program stops (OFF mode) and the error number corresponding to: Cycle overflow is
accessible in the FAULT menu.
To choose the WATCHDOG action, click on the PROGRAM icon.
Note: In certain communication phases, the cycle times are increased by the communication times
between the PC and the controller. No guarantee can be given concerning the actual cycle times
during this operating mode. The WATCHDOG is always inhibited in this controller operating mode
(Controller status).
Restricted Access
If the Restricted access option is selected then the ON/OFF and MISCELLANEOUS menus on the
front panel will no longer be accessible after writing to the controller. Only the PARAMETERS menu
functions will be accessible.
To select or deselect the Restricted access option, click on the PROGRAM icon.
How to Activate Automatic Time Change
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 237 sur 249
To activate automatic summer/winter time change, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Click on the PROGRAM icon.
Result: The program configuration window appears on the screen.
2
Click on the Date Format tab.
3
Check the Activate summer/winter time change by clicking on the box.
4
Choose the dates for the time change. To do this, there are two ways to proceed:
By using the drop-down list in front of the Zone parameter, to select a geographic zone from the three
below:
Europe
GB (United Kingdom)
USA (United States of America)
For these three zones, the dates of time changes are preconfigured and do not require any other
adjustment.
By choosing Other in the drop-down list opposite the Zone parameter, then by manually specifying the
month and the Sunday of the two time changes.
5
Click on the OK button.
Preferences of the Programming Workshop
Description
The programming workshop preferences window is used to configure the general characteristics of the
workshop:
Programming workshop language: language used in the programming workshop,
Controller language: the HMI language of the programming workshop front panel (LCD),
Working directory: path of the directory where the applications are saved on the PC (the access
path is limited to a maximum of 128 characters, including the program name and its extension).
Default colors:
Of the links in simulation and monitoring mode,
Of the background,
Of the inputs/outputs of the blocks (Specific FBD/SFC attribute).
Printing : To configure the headers and footers.
Access
The Preferences function can be accessed from the File menu.
Program Check
Overview
The Controller → Check the program menu launches program compilation. The Compilation
Results window displays the compilation result as well as a list of the resources used and available.
Compilation is carried out automatically in the following cases:
Changeover from Edit to Simulation mode
Changeover from Edit to Monitoring mode
Transferring the program to the controller
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 238 sur 249
By default, the Compilation Results window is not displayed in these cases.
How to Display or Hide the Compilation Results Window
The table below shows the different display options for the Compilation Results window.
To...
proceed as follows:
Deactivate systematic display of the window
Check the Do not display during simulation or loading in the
controller mode box.
Display the window when the systematic display is
deactivated
Select Controller → Check the program
Activate systematic display of the window
Uncheck the Do not display during simulation or loading in the
controller mode box.
Results Window Elements
The available resources depend on the controller type. The compiler calculates the volumes of
resources used in the different memory zones of the controller.
If the values calculated are greater than the available values, they appear in red.
The table below shows the different elements that are displayed in the Compilation Results window:
Elements
Description
Parameters zone
The parameters of the function blocks or automation functions.
Two bytes for each integer and 1 byte for the other types.
Zone for discrete data, etc.
Data in bit format.
One bit per discrete or Boolean element or per SFC step bit.
Zone for other data types
Data in byte format.
Two bytes for each integer.
Program zone
The number of bytes corresponding to all the program function blocks and automation
functions.
Estimated program duration (ms)
Sum of all of the individual execution times for each function used.
Controller basic cycle time (ms)
Configured cycle time. See Basic Cycle.
Write Options Window
Description
The Write options window appears before the application is transferred onto the controller: menu:
Controller → Write to the controller.
This window is used to:
Protect the controller program,
Save the modifications made using the software workshop before the program is written to the
controller,
Automatically launch the ON mode on the controller,
Protection
This option is used to protect the program by a password.
The user must enter the password for certain operations.
ON the one hand, the password protects access to the following menus on the front panel:
CLEAR PROG. (LD ON mode),
Controller CARTRIDGE > MEM (ON mode).
On the other hand, in the software workshop, the password protects access to the following functions:
Modification of the program contained in the controller,
Rereading of the program contained in the controller,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 239 sur 249
Destruction by transferring another program,
Monitoring,
Comparison of the controller data with the program,
Controller diagnostics.
Save Changes
This option is used to automatically save modifications made using the software workshop before the
program is written to the controller.
Automatic Launch of ON Mode
This option can be used to automatically switch the controller to ON mode at the end of the transfer.
Import
Overview
The File → Import command can be used to transfer all or part of another application into the current
application. The current application and the Import application must be of the same type (LD or FBD).
How to Import FBD Function Blocks and FBD MACROS
FBD function blocks and/or MACROS are imported as follows.
Step
Action
1
From an FBD application, select the menu: File → Import.
2
Select the file containing the function blocks to be imported and confirm.
Note: For importing to be possible the chosen file must contain an FBD application.
3
Select the menu: Window → Tile.
Result: The current application and the imported application windows appear one below the other.
Note: If the Import application contains MACROS, these cannot be displayed at this stage.
4
In the Import application window, select the useful function blocks and/or MACROS.
5
Drag and drop these function blocks and/or MACROS into the current application window.
Note: If a MACRO has been placed in the current window, it can now be opened using the Display MACRO
pop-up menu.
How to Import LD Cells
LD cells or lines are imported as follows.
Step
Action
1
From an LD application, select the menu: File → Import.
2
Select the file containing the function blocks to be imported and confirm.
Note: For importing to be possible the chosen file must contain an LD application.
3
Select the menu:Window → Tile.
Result: The current application and the Import application windows appear one below the other.
4
In the Import application window, select the useful cells or lines.
5
Drag and drop these cells or lines into the current application window.
Result: The current application containing the new cells or lines is then checked automatically.
Conversion of Older Applications
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 240 sur 249
At a Glance
The programming workshop lets you open and convert applications created using previous versions.
Procedure
The following table shows the procedure for opening an older application:
Step
Action
1
Select the Open command from the File menu.
2
Select the file made using the older application.
3
Confirm with Open.
Result: A conversion confirmation window will appear.
4
Confirm with OK.
5
Check and correct, if necessary, the imported program, especially the positions of the inputs and outputs,
the frequencies of the PWM, the application-specific functions.
Setting the Clock
Overview
See Connection with the controller.
The controller clock can be set by one or other of the following methods:
Using the programming workshop
Using a Modbus extension
Using an Ethernet extension
Saving an Application
Overview
When it is saved, the user application and its configuration are stored on the PC.
Access
The save functions: Save and Save As can be accessed from the File menu.
Printing the Program
At a Glance
Printing an application enables you to create full documentation for the application. It consists of:
A wiring diagram for the application,
Wiring diagram(s) of macro(s),
The content of the supervision window,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 241 sur 249
A table with the following for each symbol:
A representation of the symbol,
Its chart number,
The associated comment,
The parameter(s) with their values and their descriptions.
Commands
The following table lists the commands available from the File menu used for printing:
Command
Description
Print
Used to print the document.
Print preview
Used to preview the print job to check for the desired result.
Print setup
Opens the print setup window.
Print Options
Different items may be printed and several options are offered from the Menu: File → Print setup:
Cover Page: Cover page print of the program properties defined by the Menu: File → Properties...
Edit window: Print of the wiring diagrams with the print area options,
Macro window: Print the Macro wiring diagrams, with the same print area options as the ones in the
edit window, (this option is only available if there is at least one macro and if the macro protection
allows),
Supervision window: Print the supervision window with the print area options,
Summary table
Print the function summary table.
In LD mode, the user can decide to print the I/O, texts or other functions.
In FBD mode, the user must print either everything or nothing at all.
Page Setup to define the presentation: Portrait or Landscape,
Headers and footers.
Print Area Options
The print area options for the Edit, Macro, and Supervision windows which can be accessed from the
Menu: File → Print setup are described in the following table:
Option
Description
All
Prints the entire wiring sheet.
Visible part
Prints first the visible part of the screen at the time of printing according to, in FDB mode, the
current zoom factor. The non-visible part of the screen is printed on any space left on the page.
Selection
Prints first the selected objects at the time of printing according to, in FDB mode, the current zoom
factor. Concerning the unselected objects, they are printed on any space left on the page.
Number of sheets (1, 2 or 4 Indicates the number of sheets that will be used to print each diagram
sheets)
Includes the background
Prints the background of the wiring sheet
Page Header and Footer for Application Printing
At a Glance
This function is used to insert the following into the printed application document:
A logo in bmp format,
Text with:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 242 sur 249
Comments,
The name of the application file,
The page numbers and number of pages,
The time and the date (current, last modification).
The window is broken down into 2 series of 3 white boxes. The upper 3 correspond to the header and
the lower 3 to the footer.
Several text items or a logo can be inserted into each of the boxes.
The default contents of each of the six boxes are:
Upper left: The name of the project file followed by the version,
Upper-middle: Logo:
Upper-right: Project name (entered in the Property tab of the Program Configuration window),
Lower-left: Project name (entered in the Property tab of the Program configuration window),
Lower-middle: Date of the last project save,
Lower-right: The page number and total number of pages.
The procedures to use for customizing these default values are described further on: see Inserting a
Logo and Inserting Text.
Note: A logo and text cannot occupy the same box.
Inserting a Logo
The following table shows the procedure for inserting a logo:
Step
Action
1
Select the Print setup command from the File menu.
Result: the Print setup window appears.
2
Press the Headers and footers button.
Result: the Select headers and footers window appears.
3
Position the mouse cursor in one of the upper or lower boxes where you would like to place the logo.
4
Check the Logo box.
5
Press the ... button.
Result: the Open window appears.
6
Select the logo .bmp file.
7
Confirm with Open.
Result: the file path name appears in the selected box.
Inserting Text
The following table shows the procedure for inserting text:
Step
Action
1
Select the Print setup command from the File menu.
Result: the Print setup window appears.
2
Press the Headers and footers button.
Result: the Select headers and footers window appears.
3
Position the mouse cursor in one of the upper or lower boxes where you would like to place the text.
4
Check the Text box.
5
Press the icon corresponding to the text that you would like to insert:
# : Page number,
Σ: Number of pages,
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 243 sur 249
: Date,
: Time,
C:\: File name.
Result: the inserted text appears between { }.
6
Repeat step 5 to insert another text item in the same box or resume the procedure from step 3.
7
Confirm with OK.
Error Description
Description
The Default menu of the controllers with screen is used to display and acknowledge the errors or
warnings detected by the controller software.
To acknowledge an error or warning on a controller without screen, switch it off then on again.
Possible Errors
List of errors:
Number
Type of warning
00
No faults
01
Fault in writing to EEPROM
This fault defines transfer problems between the memory cartridge and the controller. If this fault occurs
frequently, contact after-sales service.
02
Clock write error
If this fault occurs frequently, contact after-sales service.
04
Overload on solid state relay outputs
Once a solid state relay output reaches a temperature of 170ºC, the group of 4 outputs to which it belongs is
deactivated.
To make this group of outputs operational, the cause of the over current (short-circuit, etc.) must first be
deleted, and then the fault cleared from the FAULT menu.
50
Controller software is damaged
Reload the controller software and the user application. If this problem persists, contact after-sales service.
51
Cycle overflow
The basic cycle time is too short compared to the cycle time of the application programmed in the controller.
If the application requires strict frequency or sampling of the controller inputs/outputs, lengthen the basic
cycle time. See Basic Cycle.
If, however, the application does not require the cycle time, you must choose inactive in the section
WATCHDOG Action See WATCHDOG.
52
The controller has executed an unknown operation
If the fault is permanent, reload the controller software and the user application. If this problem persists,
contact after-sales service.
53
Link between controller and bus extension faulty
Check operation of the extension (connection, power supply, fault).
54
Link between controller and Input/Output extension faulty
Check operation of the extension (connection, power supply, fault).
58
A fault is present in the controller software or on a part of the controller hardware
If the fault is permanent, reload the controller software and the user program. If this problem persists, contact
after-sales service.
59
At the start of the application in ON mode on the controller: The application cannot switch to ON
mode because it is incompatible with the physically powered controller
If this problem occurs, contact after-sales service.
60
At the start of the application in ON mode on the controller: program incompatible with the bus
extension physically connected to the supply
If this problem occurs, contact after-sales service.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
61
Page 244 sur 249
At the start of the application in ON mode on the controller: program incompatible with the
Input/Output extension physically connected to the supply.
If this problem occurs, contact after-sales service.
62
Version (or build number) incompatibility when loading a program from the backup memory
If this problem occurs, contact after-sales service.
63
Hardware configuration incompatibility when loading a program from the backup memory
If this problem occurs, contact after-sales service.
Splitting the Wiring Sheet
Introduction
The wiring sheet can be split in 2. Splitting is used to display 2 different parts of the wiring sheet on the
same screen.
How to Split the Display
To split the display, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Select the menu: Window → Split display.
2
Move the cursor to the place where you wish to split the display.
3
Click on the left mouse button.
Result: The wiring sheet will split vertically into two displays.
Structure of the Split Wiring Sheet
The split wiring sheet is structured as follows:
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 245 sur 249
The elements of the split wiring sheet are described below:
Number
Element
1
Display of the upper part.
2
Vertical scroll bar for the upper part.
3
Horizontal scroll bar for the upper part.
4
Splitting bar.
5
Display of the lower part.
6
Vertical scroll bar for the lower part.
7
Horizontal scroll bar for the lower part.
Use of the Split Wiring Sheet
The split wiring sheet can be used to perform the following actions:
To...
proceed as follows:
Make the desired function blocks appear in the upper
part...
Move the scroll bars for the upper part.
Make the desired function blocks appear in the lower
part...
Move the scroll bars for the lower part.
Move the splitting bar to the desired location...
Click on it with the mouse.
Connect the function blocks of the upper and lower part...
Click on the start block output.
Join the start block input by holding down the left mouse button
and crossing the splitting bar, if necessary.
Release.
How to Cancel the Split Display
To cancel the split display select the menu: Window → Cancel split.
Result:
The lower display disappears
The upper display is displayed on the entire wiring sheet
Note: To cancel the split display, you can also click on the splitting bar and drag it down to the scroll
bar of the lower display or to the footer.
Description of Menus
Description
Description of the programming workshop menus
File
Edit
Mode
Controller
M3MOD
Options
Display
Directories
Tools
Draw only accessible in FBD mode
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 246 sur 249
Window
File Menu
Description of commands in the File menu:
Command
Description
New
Creates a new project
Open
Opens an existing project
Close
Closes the project being edited (*)
Save
Saves the project being edited (*)
Save As
Saves the project being edited under another name (*)
Print...
Prints the project (*)
Print preview
Lets the user view the project as it will appear when printed (*)
Print setup...
Configures the print characteristics of the project (*)
Import...
Imports the edit window of another project (*)
Note: Only programs or parts of programs of the same type as the one being edited can be
imported.
Properties...
The different parameters linked to the application can be set in the Program Configuration
window.
Preferences...
Configures the general characteristics of the programming workshop.
No. name_file.pm3
List of files opened recently.
Exit
Closes the programming workshop.
Note: (*) Only available if a project file is open in the programming workshop.
Edit Menu
Description of commands in the Edit menu:
Command
Description
Cancel...
Cancels the last operation carried out (50 cancellation levels).
Redo
Redoes the action which was previously undone.
Cut
Copies and deletes the selected element (placed on the clipboard)
Copy
Copies the selected elements to the clipboard
Paste
Pastes the element from the clipboard
Insert line
Inserts a line in the wiring sheet (*)
Delete line
Deletes a line in the wiring sheet (*)
Clear
Clears the contents of all of the selected boxes
Select All
Selects the entire wiring sheet
Find...
Searches for a function in the program using its name or an associated comment.
Find Item
Lists all the functions used in the project (*)
Activate display dependencies
mode
Activates or deactivates the mode used to display the functions depending on a node or
function. (**)
Note: (*) Only available in LD mode.
(**) Only available in FBD mode.
Mode Menu
Description of commands in the Mode menu:
Command
Description
Edit
Used to build programs, which corresponds to development of the application.
Simulation
The program is executed offline directly in the programming workshop (simulated on the
PC).
Monitoring
The program is executed on the controller, the programming workshop is connected to the
controller.
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 247 sur 249
Controller Menu
Description of commands in the Controller menu:
Command
Description
Choose the type of controller...
Choice of controller type with its associated functions and connected extensions.
Connection...
Submenus:
Configure: Sets up the serial link connection parameters between the
programming workshop and the controller
Connect: Used to connect to the remote station via a modem link.
Disconnect: Used to disconnect from the remote station if a modem link is
being used.
Read in the controller
Transfers the application from the controller to the PC
Write to the controller
Transfers the application from the PC to the controller
Compare the data in the controller with Used to compare the data contained in the controller and the data produced by
compiling the programming workshop's application.
the program
Clear the controller contents
Clears the program and erases all data in the controller
Controller diagnostics
The diagnostics function allows you to view the controller characteristics.
Check program
Checks program consistency.
Start controller and Reset saved
parameters
Initializes and starts the program.
Start controller without Reset
Starts the program without initializing the current values of functions for which the
Save on power failure is activated.
Turn the controller off
Stops the program.
Read/Write date and time
Used to configure the controller clock.
List of application-specific functions
Submenus:
In the controller ...: displays the list of application-specific functions available in
the controller.
In the application ...: used to display and modify the list of application-specific
functions that can be used in the application.
Update controller software
Used to load a new version of the software in the controller.
Remote Control of Front Panel
Used to remotely control the controller connected to the PC.
ON: starts the program
OFF: stops the program
M3MOD
Description of commands in the M3MOD menu:
Command
Description
DM3MOD diagnostics
Used to display the characteristics of the communication extension.
Update the M3MOD software
Used to load a new version of the software in the communication extension.
Message ON
Used to activate the communication extension.
Message OFF
Used to deactivate the communication extension.
Options Menu
Description of commands in the Options menu:
Command
Description
Modify colors
Used to define different colors to display in the programming workshop
Date format
Sets the date format in the program configuration window.
Display Menu
Description of commands in the Display menu:
Command
Description
Status bar
Shows or hides the status bar dialog box (at the bottom of the programming
workshop window).
Function bar.
Displays or hides the function bar (**)
Toolbar list
Displays or hides the toolbar.
Standard toolbar
Display bar
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 248 sur 249
Drawing bar
Controller bar
Simu/monitoring bar
Program view
Used to create or modify a program.
Program view in LD mode
Program view in FBD mode
Settings view
Lists all the automation functions with parameters used in the application.
Settings view in LD mode
Settings view in FBD mode
Comments
Used to show/hide the program comments (the comments are displayed under the
function block). (**)
Block numbers
Displays/hides the function block numbers (**)
Grid
Submenus(**):
Display the grid: Shows/hides the wiring sheet grid.
Spacing: Defines the spacing of the grid bars.
Zoom (Y)
Configures the zoom factor of the wiring sheet (25 to 150%)
Ladder symbols
Displays the program in Ladder symbols (*)
Electrical symbols
Displays the program in electrical symbols (*)
Note: (*) Only available in LD mode.
(**) Only available in FBD mode.
Directories Menu
Description of commands in the Directories menu:
Command
Description
Directory of remote stations...
Used to configure the telephone numbers of remote stations.
Directory of program recipients...
Used to configure the telephone numbers and access rights of recipients associated
with a program.
General directory of recipients...
Used to create a list of recipients regularly used when writing programs.
Tools Menu
Description of commands in the Tools menu (FBD-specific):
Command
Description
Align
Positions objects in relation to one another:
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Center objects vertically
Center objects horizontally
Distribute
Distribute objects:
Distribute horizontally
Distribute vertically
Order
Positions objects in relation to one another:
Bring to front
Send to back
Group
Creates composite objects
Ungroup
Ungroups composite objects
Create a Macro
Groups together several FBD functions in one Macro (**).
Display Macro
Displays the details of a Macro (**).
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
CLSM3 Online Help
Page 249 sur 249
Renumber functions
Used to reassign the numbers of consecutive blocks starting from number B00 (**).
Renumber links
Used to reassign numbers of consecutive links (**)
Wiring mode
Used to change the type of link between the function blocks (**):
Text
Wiring
(This option specifies the type for all future links)
Type of wiring
Used to change the type of link between the function blocks (**):
Text
Wiring
Modify text
(This option specifies the type only for the active link)
Note: (**)Only available in FBD mode.
Draw Menu
In the edit and supervision sheet, you can create squares, ellipses, lines or text. You can also insert an
image in Bmp format.
Window Menu
Description of commands in the Window menu:
Command
Description
Cascade
Organizes the windows in cascade
Tile
Tiles the windows horizontally
Arrange icons
Rearranges the windows
Split display/Cancel split
Divides the display in two parts, each displaying one part of the wiring
sheet./Cancel this split.
List of open windows
Activates the selected window, Front panel, Supervision or Edit
Help menu
Description of commands in the Help menu:
Command
Description
Help
Provides access to the online help
About the programming workshop
Displays program information, the version number and copyright details
file://D:\documents and Settings\BOUCLU2\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9C88.htm
23/05/2007
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising